HomeMy WebLinkAboutEastview Community Center
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENT NAME: ~\J\eu0 c..c:xnmU\\~ c.er'I\e(
DOCUMENT TYPE: (t)~C\~+
YEAR: ex)
BOX NUMBER: \ \
FILE NUMBER: \~t:Rv
NUMBER OF PAGES: 3/'7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
j.-:i, 11 ISo 9' fe
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
prepared for
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
AND
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY HOUSING
& NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
One 10th Street, Suite 430
Augusta, Georgia 30901
Phone: (706) 821-1797 .:. Fax: (706) 821-1784
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c.
. ENGINEERS + DESIGNERS + CONSULTANTS.
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
NOVEMBER 2000 JLA JOB No. 42.0002
yf-lIo. ;)~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
prepared for
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
AND
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY HOUSING
& NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
One 10th Street, Suite 430
Augusta, Georgia 30901
Phone: (706) 821-1797 .:. Fax: (706) 821-1784
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c.
~ ENGINEERS ~ DESIGNERS ~ CONSULTANTS ~
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
NOVEMBER 2000 JLA JOB No. 42.0002
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I NOVEMBER 2000
;;
.
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
prepared for
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
AND
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY HOUSING
& NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
One 10th Street, Suite 430
Augusta, Georgia 30901
Phone: (706) 821-1797 .:. Fax: (706) 821-1784
prepared by
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c.
+ ENGINEERS + DESIGNERS + CONSULTANTS +
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
JLA JOB No. 42.0002
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
NEW EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
/Division SectiQD Ti(le
PaRes!
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
I n vita ti 0 n to Bid ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
Bid Form---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
Ins tru ction s to B idd ers --------------------__________________________________________________________________ 6
Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of Bidders------------------------------- 7
Certification for Business Concerns Seeking Section 3 Preference -----------------------------1
Non-Co II usion A ffid avit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
Gene ra I Cond itions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
S u pp Ie me nta I Ge nera I Cond itions -------------------__________________u____________________________-- 4
Additional Supplemental Conditions - Mandatory Compliance for Section 3------------------- 5
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor on the basis of a
Sti p ulated Pri ce-------u---------------------------____________________------------------------------- 7
Notice of A wa rd ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
Notice to Proceed ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
Ap pi ication for P ayment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
C ha n g e 0 rd e r ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Certificate of Substantial Completion --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Bid Bo nd ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Perfornna n ce Bond ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
P ayme nt Bond --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Certificate of Owner's Attorney ----------------------------------------------------------------------------1
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work -------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
01007 Applications for Payment ------------------------------------------------------------------------4
01200 Project Meetings --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
01230 Alte rn ates----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
01300 Su bm itta Is ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7
0171 0 F i na I Clea n i ng ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02221 B u i Id i n g 0 emol itio n------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7
02230 Site C lea ri ng ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
02300 Ea rthwork -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
TOC-l
K :\420002\ADMlHISPECSlFrontlTDC.doe
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
NEW EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
02361
02511
02821
02900
Term ite Control ------------------------------~-------------------------------------------------------- 4
Hot - M ix As pha It P avi ng --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 0
Chain-Link Fences And Gates ------------------------------------.;.------------------------------- 7
Lan d s ca pin g -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 0
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100 Mortar ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
04150 Masonry Accessories------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
04200 Unit Mason ry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry
06176 Meta I-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses ----------------------------------------------------------- 5
06200 Fin is h Ca rpe ntry -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
06220 Millwork - Ca b i ne ts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07176 Da m p proofi ng W a 11--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
07190 Vapor Barrier ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
07210 Building Insulation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
07311 Composition Shingles ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
07600 Sheet Metal Flashing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2
07900 J oi nt Sea Ie rs ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Metal Doors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
08115 Metal Door Frames And Special Window Frames-------------------------------------------- 2
0821 0 Wood Doors ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
08340 Sectional Overhead Doors --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
08400 Entrances And Storefronts ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
TOC-2
K:\420002\AOMlNISPECS\FrontlTOC,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
NEW EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
08710
08800
Fi n ish Ha rdwa re ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
C3lazing----------------------------------------------_____________________________________________________ ~
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09~60 C3ypsum Board Systems ----------------------------------__________________________________________ ~
09300 Tile W ork ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
09511 Acoustical Tile Ceilings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
09650 Res i I ient F loori ng ---------------------------------___________________________________________________ ~
09680 Ca rpe t ------------------------------------------------------- ---- ----------------------------------------- 4
09900 Pa inti ng -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
1 0160 Toilet Partitions --------------------------_____________________________________________________________ ~
1 0440 S pecia Ity S ig ns -----------------------------------______________________________________________________ ~
1 05~~ Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets --------------________________________________________________________ ~
1 0800 Toilet And Bath Accessories --------------__________________________________________________________ ~
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11450 Residential Eq uipment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods ------------------------------------------------------ 9
1 5055 M 0 to rs --------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------- 4
15060 Hangers And Supports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
15081 Duct Insulation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
15083 Pipe Insulation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------_____ 10
15100 V a/yes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
15411 Water Distribution Piping ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
154 ~O D ra i n age And Vent Pip i ng ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
15430 Plumbing Specialties ------------------------------------------------------___________m___________ 3
15440 PI u mb i ng Fixtu res ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
15530 Refrigerant Piping ----------------_______m____________m_____________________------------------ 4
15738 Split-System Air-Conditioning Units ----------------------------------------------------------- 4
15815 Metal Ducts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
158~0 Duct Accessories ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
TOC-3
K;\420002\ADMINISPEC5\Fron"TOC.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
.
I
.
.
INVITATION TO BID
Sealed Bids will be received at this office until 11 :00 am legally prevailing time on December 19, 2000 for
the construction of:
Bid Item # 00-160 New Eastview Community Center - Project No. 42.0002
Geri A. Sams
The Augusta-Richmond County Purchasing Department
530 Greene Street - Room 605
Augusta, GA 30911
At the time and place noted above the proposals will be publicly opened and read. No extension of the bidding
period will be made.
Bidding documents may be obtained at the office of the engineer, Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.C.,
Consulting Engineers, 1296 Broad Street, Augusta, Georgia 30901. Applications for documents, together with
a non-refundable deposit of $50.00 per set shall be filed promptly with the engineer. Bidding material will
be forwarded, shipping charges collected, as soon as possible. Bid documents may be viewed at the following
locations: The Augusta Richmond County Commission Purchasing Department, The Engineer's Office, Dodge
Plan Room, Augusta Builder's Exchange.
It is the wish of the Owner that minority businesses are given the opportunity to bid on the various parts of the
work. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive bidding or to increase
the cost of the work. The Owner supports a healthy free market system that seeks to include responsible
businesses and provide ample opportunity for business growth and development.
Contract, if awarded, will be on a lump sum basis. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after time
has been called on the date of opening. Bids must be accompanied by a bid bond and in an amount not less
than 10% of the base bid. Both a performance bond and a payment bond will be required in an amount equal
to 100% of the contract price.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive technicalities and informalities. Please mark
Bid Item # and Project Name on the outside of the envelope.
Any objections to the specifications as set forth should be filed in writing prior to bid opening.
The successful bidder must abide by the Davis-Bacon Act and the Federal Labor Standard Provisions. The
project will be partly Federally funded according the lowest bid and subject to Section 3 of the HUD Act of
1968, as amended, 12 V.S.C. 170lu Section 3). The purpose of Section 3 is to insure that employment and
other economic opportunities generated by HUD-assisted projects covered by Section 3, shall, to the greatest
extent feasible, be directed to low and very low income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of
HUD assistance for Housing within the project area, being Augusta-Richmond County.
GERI A. SAMS, Purchasing Director
Augusta-Richmond County
Consolidated Government
Augusta Chronicle - November 21, 28 and December I, 6, 2000
Metro Courier - November 22, 2000
1l\420002\ADMINlSPECSlFron1\INV.BIO.OOC
I:. ." ~,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date: December 19, 2000
PROJECT NAME:
New Eastview Community Center
TIllS BID IS SUBMITIED TO:
Augusta-Richmond County Conunission
Purchasing Department, Room 605
Municipal Building
530 Greene Street
Augusta, GA 30911
1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and
furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price
and within the Contract Time indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents.
2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition
of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty days after the day of Bid
opening. BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents
required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of OWNER'S Notice
of Award.
3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that:
a. BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following
Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged):
Date
12-5-00
12-12-00
12-13-00
Number
1
2
3
b. BIDDER has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site,locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations
that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
c. BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining
and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and
studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise
BF-I
I(:W~..-.un~""'.rvv-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract
Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will
be required by BIDDER for such purposes.
d.
BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on
the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said
Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, reports or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities
are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the WORK at the
Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4.3 of the General Conditions.
e.
BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents.
f.
BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies
that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof
by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER.
g.
This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement
or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not
directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham
Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain
from bidding;, and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any
advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER.
BIDDER will complete the WORK for the following price(s):
BASE BID
5.
Total Lump Sum $ ~L}1 ,<?CG.N". . ~'~'
C' '1" 'r I i c,:-~L:u,( ) L ,,-,-tr=,,, - t\u..... :.}l \&\.o,-'~( l"-l( ~\~-l't- iL'I.~'~1.. '\J ~'--)
'>;;)....." ~ v fllt"'-.:.Xl:"'VJ,..
Reference Specification Section 0 I 030 - Alternates, paragraph 3 .1.A - 3.I.E.
A.
B.
Alternate No. I: Add $
-,
( ~ _ ,I, C'", ,
" t ;.........., l":..,, ....,"--. .", ,.', '-- ~,-,-'.!l..c.~ .-
. "-.~ ',... 'V --,,-u... '-'--......._ /'
C. Alternate No. 3'. Add $ 'j r-/ .< C' ('. (/ ~ ,1, Ii \ ---
~. ~ll "'- - ''NI.C ..:{:L{. (, ......Ll......""\i... _ "\ I '\1'
. /) ~\'o. .---
1':1:;t:;J~Lt.. C~t'LL"lL \& "- - ~) ;<) c'i)'" C,<.,:X",(:UoL4-
rC-L.''4--L~' LLC- 3 cc 3/ '3 BF.2
!i7c,(,cf'
Alternate No.2: Add $
. ~,
(:j\.L'-'.:t" - E\ ~k't t~,J.\;J..... ~ ~..C,-!_\:,,;, j
..J
;(;',:::--, \:' 7\
'" )'
.. r-..
~ ~,-'-'),'l.i.>
K:\4~ORM.OOC .'
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"
The Owner may elect to accept any Add Alternate in any order that may be advantageous to
the owner, and incorporate sum as a Change Order. Contractor shall notify the Owner when
the decision of accepting an Add Alternate must be made for the Contractor to be able to
hold the stated "Add Cost" in the above bid form.
A. A tabulation of subcontractors, 'suppliers [and other] individuals and entities is
required to be identified in this bid.
6. BIDDER agrees that the work will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance
with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions on or before ~ days after notice to
proceed.
I
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:
a) Bid Bond
b) . Bidder's Qualification Statement
8. Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to:
The address of BIDDER indicated below.
Continental Construction Co., Inc.
4190 Crosstowne Court
Evans. Ga. 30809
9. The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction
Contract included as part of the Contract Documents have the meanings assigned to them in
the General Conditions.
SUBMIITED on
December 19
2000
If BIDDER is:
An Individual
By
N/A
doing business as
(Individual's Name)
Business address:
Phone No.:
BF-3
I-
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A Partnership
By N/ A
(Individual's Name)
(General Partner)
Business address:
Phone No.:
A Corporation
By Continental Construction Co., Inc.
(Corporation Name)
By
Georgia
(_dl~
~ Person Au~_1o SIgn)
Richard L. Horton
By
By ,
President
(TiUe)
BF-4
1(:"'2Dl101.ADMI~1DFORY.OOC'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I.
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
.t
(Corporation Seal)
r-'.\. '
Attest ''--U'- (},.. tL (l... ~
())'\0.~ -'---
Dianne Heese
(Secretary)
State of Incorporation - Georgia
Business address:
4190 Crosstowne Court
Evans. Ga. 30809
Phone No:,
706-860-3846
A Joint Venture
By N/ A
(Name)
(Address)
By
(Name)
(Address)
(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individua1~ partnership and
corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above).
BF-S
THE
I(
.1
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
--
I
I
AMERICAN
NSTI'rUTE
o F
ARCHITECTS
co
I
AlA Document AJ05
Contractor's Qualification Statement
1986 EDITION
This Jorm is approved and recommended by The American Institute oj Architects
(AlA) and The Associated General Contractors oj America (AGC)Jor use in et'aluat-
ing the qualifications oj contractors. No endorsement oj the submitting party or
verification of the information is made by the AlA or A Gc.
The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and suffi-
ciently complete so as not to be misleading.
SUBMITTED TO: Augusta-Richmond County Commission
ADDRESS: 530 Greene St., Augusta, Ga. 30911
SliBMITTED BY:
Ric..'1ard L. Horton
Corporation [j:
Partnership 0
Individual 0
Joint Venture 0
Other 0
NAME:
Continental Construction Co., Inc.
ADDRESS: P.O. Box 204198, Augusta, Ga. 30917-4198
PRIfl.:CIPAL OFFICE: 4190 Crosstowne Court, Evans, Ga. 30809
NAME OF PROJECT (if applicable):
TYPE OF WORK (file separate form for each Classification of Work):
X General Construction
HVAC
Electrical
Plumbing
Other
..
(please specify)
Copyri&ht 1964, 1%9, 19i9, @1986by The .\merican Institute of Architects. 17~:; New York .\\"enue, N.\X'.. \X.a.~hin&.
ton, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or suhst:Ultial qUOlation of its provisions wilhout wrillen permission
of the AlA violates the copyrighl laws of the L'niled Stales and will be suhject to lep,al pro~cutilln.
, , .' AlA DOCUMENT A305 . CONTRACTOR'S QI"AI.IFICATlO:\ ~T,\TOIE:-;T . 11)H(, EDITION. AlA ~ . (5) I'lH6
THE A.\IERICA:-IINSTITCTE OF ARCHITECTS. l-.~'i :'<EIl' )"OR" WE:--:I'E, N"Il'.. ll'ASHINGTO:--;, D.C. lIKK)(,
A305-1986
1
I!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
1.4
1.5
ORGANIZA liON
1.1 How many years has your organization been In business as a Contractor?
1.2
years (October, 1976)
How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name?
years (October, 1976)
1.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated?
N/A
1.3
If your organization is a corporation, answer the following:
1.3.1 Date of incorporation: 1-12-79 '
1.3.2 State of incorporation: Georgia
1.3.3 President's name: Richard L. Horton
1.3.4 Vice-president's name(s): Ralph C. (Skip) Net\lIlaI1, Jr.
1.3.5
1.3.6
M. Dianne Meese
Secretary's name:
Treasurer's name:
If your organization is a partnership, answer the following:
1.4.1 Date of organization:
1.4.2 Type of partnership (if applicable):
1.4,3 Name(s) of general panner(s):
N/A
If your organization is individually owned. answer the following:
1.5.1 Date of organization:
1.5.2 Name of owner:
N/A
AlA DOCUMENT A30S . CO:\TRACTOR'S <.,?l'Al.II'ICATIO:\ ~",\TI'.\IE:\" . 1<)1<(, EflITIO:-- . ,\I'\! . .;.IWIl>
TilE A.\Ir.RJl',\:" I:\SlTITTE 01' ARCIIITECTS. 1-.\'; :\1'\1(' YORK ,~\'E:\I'E. :\,\\', \I;''\SIII:\l;TO:'\. fl.C. .!IIIHl(,
A305-1986 2
I;
(I ')
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I .J
I
.:.,
1.6 If the form of you~ organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals:
N/A, .'
2. ' LICENSING
2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business,
and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable.
Georgia - General Contractor
South Carolina - General Contractor
2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed.
N/A
3. EXPERIENCE
3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces.
Steel, Carpentry, Concrete
3.2 Claims and Suits. (If the' answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.)
3.2.1
Has ~ur organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it?
3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding
against your organization or its officers?
No
3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construc-
tion contracts within the last five years?
No
.t3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or
principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is
yes, please attach details.) No
AlA DOCI):.'lENT A305. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AlA- . @1986
THE AMl'lllCAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
A305.1986 3
I-
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the
name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion
date. See Attached
3.4.1
State total worth of work in progress and under contract:
$2,150,000 approx.
3.5
On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years,
giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of
the cost of the work performed with your own forces.
See Attached
3.5.1 State avera~e annual amo~nt of construction work performed during the past five years:
$4,772,000 approx.
3.6
On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individ-
uals of your organization,
See Attached
4.1
4. REFERENCES
Trade References:
4.2
4.3
Maner Builders Supply ~ Augusta, Ga. 706-863-6191
Augusta Ready Mix - Augusta, Ga, 706~733-9781
Boral Bricks - Augusta, Ga. 706-722-6831
Macuch Steel Products ~. Augusta, Ga. 706-823-2420
Augusta Concrete Block Co. - Augusta, Ga. 803~279-7620
Bank References:
SunTrust Bank - Roy Ellis - 706~821-2008
Surety:
Safeco Insurance
4.3,1
Name of bonding company:
BB&T Boyle-Vaughan Insurance (Agent)
Safeco Insurance Co.
Charlotte, NC
4.3.2 Name and address of agent:
BB&T Boyle-Vaughan Insurance
P.O. Box 8628, Columbia, SC 29202
AlA DOCUMENT A305. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AIAo!I . @19R6
THE AMERICAN INSTlTCTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17,5 NEW YORK AVENUE, l".\X', , WASHiNGTON. D.C. 20006
A305-1986 4
I,
il
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
1
I
I
~
1
I.
5. FINANCING
5.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.2
Financial Statement.
5.1.1
Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest
balance sheet and income statement showing the following items:
DUNS tm9-858-8015
. Current Assets (e,g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes
receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials Inventory and prepaid
expenses);
Net Fixed Assets;
Other Assets;
Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, pro-
vision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes);
Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares
par, values, earned surplus and retained earnings).
Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof:
Coursey, . Deming & CO.. .
P..O. Box 15113, Augusta, Ga. 30919
.' Is the attached financial statement for the Identical organization named on page one?
. 'Yes
If not, explain the relationship ,and financial responsibility of the organization whose
financial statement is provided (e.g., parent-subsidiary).
Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for con-
struction? Yes
AlA DOCUMENT 0\305. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATiON STATEMEIIo"T. 1986 EDITION. AlA. . @19116
THE AMERIcAN INSTlTl TI! OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YO!tK AVENl'E. N,~'., ~'ASHINGTON, D,C, 20006
A305-1986 5
I-
I 6.
0)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t \
I /
I
"
SIGNA lURE
6.1 Dated at
Continental this
December
"19
day of
~
2000
By:
Continental Construction Co. ,
4#ft--rt~
Inc.
Name of Organization:
(Richard L. Horton)
Title: President
6.2
M ~. Richard L. Horton being
duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be
misleading.
Subscribed and sworn before me this
day of
19
December
l:\ '0.. L ", J/1r. I, ~.' . .
Notary Public\-.,:,) L ~: r ""- ~'-
~ 2000
(Diarme Meese)
My Commission Expires:
4-18-2004
AlA OO(!JMENT A305 · CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AlA- . @1986
THE AMlIlICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
A305-1986 6
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTINENTAL CONSTRUCTION COMPANY. INC.
RICHARD l. HORTON. PRESIDENT
DIANNE MEESE. CORPORATE SECRETARY
706-860-3846
706-863-0306 (FAX)
P.O. BOX 204198 . AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30917-4198
3.4 PROJECTS
A. Brian Merry Elementary School Addition & Renovation
Augusta, Ga.
Richmond County Board of Education - Owner
The Hinman Architectural Group - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-722-3052
$2,149,685.00 - Contract to date
95% complete as of November, 2000
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTINENTAL CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC.
RICHARD l. HORTON. PRESIDENT
DIANNE MEESe. CORPORATE SECRETARY
706-860-3846
706-863-0306 (FAX)
P.O, BOX 204198 . AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30917-4198
3.5 PROJECTS-
Econo Lodge
Augusta, Ga.
Sapna & Nisha, lnc, - Owner
Dort B. Payne - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-724-2475
762,688.75 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete as of 1-27-89
Econo Lodge Recreation Building
Augusta, Ga.
Sapna & Nisha, Inc. - Owner
Dort B. Payne - Architect
165,835.00 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete 6-30-89
Riverside Forest Products Office Building
Augusta, Ga.
Magnum Properties - Owner
Fred G. Sigg - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-733-2439
194,991.68 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete as of 11-30-88
Monte Sano Elementary School Renovations
Augusta, Ga.
Richmond County Board of Education - Owner
W oodhurst Partnership - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-724-4343
544,557.12 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete as of 11-30-88
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Harlem Baptist Church Renovations & Modifications
Harlem, Ga.
Harlem Baptist Church - Owner
W oodhurst Partnership - Architect
236,022.60 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete as of 4-30-89
wIlCU Modifications at the V.A. Medical Center
Augusta, Ga.
Veterans Adminsitration - Owner
100% Complete as of7-28-89
Metter High School (New Kitchen)
Metter, Ga.
Candler County Board of Education - Owner
James W. Buckley & Associates - Architect
Swainsboro, Ga. 912-237-6467
272,441.00 - Contract Amount to date
100% Complete as of 12-89
Senior Citizens Center
Augusta, Ga.
The City Council of Augusta., Ga. - Owner
Nicholas Dickinson & Associates - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-722-7488
146,634.97 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 12-89
Health & Human Services Facility
Glascock County, Gibson, Ga.
Glascock County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Chandler, Armentrout & Roebuck, P.C. - Architect
Athens, Ga. 404-548-8211
276,387.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 6-90
Improvements to Underwood Homes
Augusta., Ga.
The Housing Authority of City of Augusta., Ga. - Owner
Fred G. Sigg - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-733-2439
632,130,00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 11-90
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
DNR Regional Headquarters & Dept of Public Safety Bldgs
Thomson, Ga.
McDuffie County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Precision Planning, Inc. - Architect
Lawrenceville, Ga. 404-962-8000
338,141. 00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 10-90
Tabernacle Baptist Church Elevator Addition
Augusta, Ga.
Tabernacle Baptist Church - Owner
Fred G. Sigg - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-733-2439
84,832.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 8-31-90
Old Medical College Elevator Addition
The City of Augusta, Ga. - Owner
Norman Askins - Architect
Atlanta, Ga. - 404-233-6565
57,225.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 5-91
Department of Family & Childrens Services
Appling, Ga.
Columbia County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Nicholas Dickinson & Associates - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-722-8488
574,690,53 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 7 -91
Stinson Guest House-Replace HV AC System
Ft. Gordon, Ga.
Department of the Army, Ft. Gordon - Owner
218,461.64 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of3-91
Avery Landing Shopping Center
Martinez, Ga.
Robert Stephens/Doyle Tunison - Owners
Martinez, Ga. 706-868-5050
301,413.68 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of7-91
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Administrative Office Building
Augusta, Ga.
The Housing Authority of the City of Augusta - Owner
Augusta, Ga. 706-722-1992
862,365.10 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 11-91
Renovation of The Augusta College Gymnasium
Board of Regents of the University System of Ga. - Owner
VGR Architects - Architect
Augusta, Ga. 706-722-1992
234,547.26 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 8-91
Hart County Senior Citizens Center
Hartwell, Ga.
Hart County Board of Commissioners - Owner
G. Hubert Jones & Associates - Architect
Marietta., Ga. - 404-973-2615
363,922.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 11-91
Holy Trinity Greek Orthodox Church Renovation
Augusta., Ga.
Greek Orthodox Church - Owner
Sandeford & Webb Architects, Inc. - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-733-0555
206,437.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 1-92
New Public Safety Building-
Georgia Southern University
Statesboro, Ga.
Board of Regents of the University System of Ga. - Owner
Facilities Planning & Space Utilization - Architect
Statesboro, Ga. - 912-681-5237
578,551.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 10-92
VGR Architects - Architect
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Edgefield County Water & Sewer Authority Office Bldg.-
Edgefield County Water & Sewer Authority - Owner
Edgefield, S. C.
Martin Buckley - Architect
Aiken, S. C.
92,998.82 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 7-92
Renovations to the Bulloch County Courthouse Annex
for the E 911 Center
Statesboro, Ga.
Bulloch County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Robert M. Hagan - Architect
Statesboro, Ga. - 912-764-9586
140,782.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 10-92
Administrative/Community Building-Southside Terrace
Housing Authority of the City of Augusta, Ga.
Completion Contract for Amwest Surety Insurance Co.
Holroyd Johnson & Partners - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-6180
237,998,50 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 10-92
Augusta Fire Station #5
City of Augusta, Georgia - Owner
Completion Contract for Amwest Surety Insurance Co.
VGR Architects - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-1992
363,471.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 07 -93
Grovetown Public Works Department
City of Grovetown - Owner
Precision Planning, Inc. - Architect
Lawrenceville, Ga. - 404-962-8000
215,116.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 12-92
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Hephzibah High School Football Bleachers
Hephzibah, Ga.
Richmond County Board of Education - Owner
Marvin E. Powell - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-796-4601
114,300.00 - Contract to date
100% as of 9-92
Medipac Plant - Modoc, S.c.
Upper Savannah Development Corporation
Surgimach Corp, - 706-790-7793
203,4822.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 05-93
Hammond Hill Elementary School Renov/ Addition
North Augusta, S.c.
Aiken County Board of Education - Owner
VGR Architects - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-1992
1,553,210.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 2-94
Grovetown PolicelFire Station
City of Grovetown - Owner
Precision Planning, Inc. - Architect
Lawrenceville, Ga. - 404-962-8000
805,650.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 2-94
Scruggs Clinic New Office Building
Augusta, Ga.
Wanda Scruggs - Owner
Marvin Powell - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-796-4901
161,448.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 8-93
Riverside Park Facility
Martinez, Ga.
Columbia County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Roger W, Davis - Landscape Architect, Inc. -Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-4666
621,029,00 - Contract to date, 100% Complete as of 2-94
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Addition to Admin. Bldg.-Augusta Youth Development
Augusta, Ga.
State of Georgia - Owner
Gary B. Coursey & Assoc. - Architects
Atlanta, Ga. - 404-998-3333
156,837.00 - Contract to date
I
100% Complete as of3-94
Distribution Center for Maner Builders Supply
Martinez, Ga.
Maner Builders Supply - Owner (Dave Maner)
Wallace Watts - Architect
Evans, Ga. - 706-863-2988
1,220,934.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 6-94
AAFES Warehouse
Fort Gordon, Ga.
Army & Air Force Exchange Service - Owner
Doug Olney, CF-O - Architect
286,370.00 - Contract to Date
J 00% Complete as of 7 -94
Augusta Turf & Tractor
Augusta, Ga.
Robert Stevens & Doyle Tunison - Owner
Marvin Powell - Architect
305,861.00 - Cotract to date
100% Complete as of 1-95
Westmont Elementary School Renovation
Columbia County, Ga.
Columbia County School System - Owner
Contact - Bill Pittman - 706-541-2731
Harley & Sipper Architects - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-2475
806,072.50 - Contract to Date
100% Complete as of 9-94
I"
1
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
35. Projects (Continued)
Bel Air Elementary School Renovation
Columbia County, Ga.
Columbia County School System - Owner
Contact - Bill Pittman - 706-541-2731
Hinman Architectural Group - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-3052
834,585.00 - Contract to Date
100% Complete as of 9-94
Savannah River Ecology Lab Conference Center
Aiken County, S.c.
University of Georgia Research Foundation - Owner
Hinman Architectural Group - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-3052
486,614.00 - Contract to Date
100% Complete as of 12-94
Georgia Carpet Outlet
Aiken, S.c.
Willis Edmondson - Owner
Marvin Powell - Architect
202,723.00 - Contrsct to date
100% Complete as of 4-95
Savannah Place Multipurpose Center
Richmond County, Ga.
Board ofConurussioners of Richmond County - Owner
The Woodhurst Partnership - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-4343
466,095.00 - Contract
100% complete as of 11-95
Brookwood & Westmont School Additions
Columbia County, Ga.
Columbia County Board of Education - Owner
Harley & Sipper - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-2475
1,142,212.00 - Contract
100% complete as of 8-95
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
1. Madden Reid Building
Richmond County, Ga.
Housing Authority of the City of Augusta -Owner
Virgo Gambill Architects
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-1992
417,322.00 - Contract
100% complete as of 1-96
Wilkes County Health Department
Wilkes County, Ga.
Wilkes County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Precision Planning - Architect
Lawrenceville, Ga. - 770-338-8000
459,478.00 - Contract
100% complete 4-96
Augusta College Bookstore Expansion
Richmond County, Ga.
Board of Regents of University System, Ga. - Owner
The Hinman Architectural Group - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-3052
648,854.25 - Contract to date
100% complete as of 3-97
Tri-County Health Systems
Warrenton, Ga.
Tri-County HEalth Systems - Owner
Wood, Morris and Associates - Architect
Macon, Ga. - 912-745-4945
1,266,182.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of3-97
Elijah Clark State Park Comfort Station
Lincolnton, Ga.
Georgia Department of Natural Resources - Owner
Ga. Dept. of Natural Resources - Architect
Lithia Springs, Ga. - 770-732-5800
145,400.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of 7 -96
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Belle Terrace Senior Citizens Center
Augusta, Ga.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission - Owner
Precision Planning, Inc. - Architect
Lawrenceville, Ga. - 770-338-8000
500,834.00 - Contract to date
i 100% complete as of 4-97
Georgia Carpet Outlet - Augusta
Doug Edmondson - Owner
Marvin Powell - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-796-4901
400,000.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of 12-96
Addition to Hangar 5 - Garrett Aviation
Bush Field Municipla Airport - Augusta, Ga.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission - Owner
Cheatham, Fletcher, Scott & Sears - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-2668
454,951.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of 03-97
Wilkes County Law Enforcement Center
Washington, Ga.
Wilkes County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Precision Planning, Inc. - Architect
LawrenceviIle, Ga. - 770-338-8000
2,507,679.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of 7-98
New Offices/Fine Arts Center
Augusta State University, Augusta, Ga.
Board of Regents of the University System, Ga. - Owner
Cheatham, Fletcher, Scott & Sears - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-2668
185,602.00 - Contract to date
100% complete as of3-98
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
3.5 Projects (Continued)
Central Lab & Maintenance Buildings
Evans, Ga.
Columbia County Board of Commissioners - Owner
Johnson, Laschober & Associates - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-724-5756
852,384.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 12-98
Richmond Academy Stadium Renovation Phase II
Augusta, Ga.
Richmond County Board of Education - Owner
Marvin E. Powell - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-796-4901
869,000.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of 7 -98
South Augusta Recreation Complex
Augusta, Ga.
Augusta-Richmond Council/Commission - Owner
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst - Architect
Augusta, Ga. - 706-722-1588
2,461,916.00 - Contract to date
100% Complete as of3-00
I"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTINENTAL CONSTRUCTION COMPANY. INC.
RICHA RD l. HORTON. PRESIDENT
DIANNE MEESE. CORPORATE SECRETARV
706-860-3846
706-863-0306 (FAX)
P.O, BOX 204198 . AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30917-4198
3.6 CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE OF KEY INDIVIDUALS-
Richard L. Horton-President & Owner
Southern Technical institute in Atlanta, Ga.
5 years Superintendent for construction company
2 years self-employed Sub-contractor with own crew
24 years in business as General Contractor-
(Continental Construction Company, Inc.)
W. Paul Cannady-Construction Superintendent
Attended Augusta Technical Institute
15 years construction experience with Continental
(Majority of those years were Superintnedent position)
Milton Sheppard-EstimatorlProject Manager
23 years construction experience
Had own business
6 months with Continental Construction
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
-
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Defined Terms.
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1983 ed.) have the meanings assigned to
them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid directly to
Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful
Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on
the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding
Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid
Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of
Bids).
2. Copies of Bidding Documents.
2.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum stated in
the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Engineer.
2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the
use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3 Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above
terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a
license or grant for any other use.
3. Qualifications of Bidders.
To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit
within five (5) days of Owner's request written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience, present commitments and other such data as may be called for below (or in the
Supplementary Instructions). Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do
business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior
to award of the contract.
4. Examination of Contract Documents and Site.
4.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local
conditions that may affect cost, progress performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)
consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's
IB-I
C:\W1NDOWS\TEMPUNST-BID.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
4.2 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to
Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner
does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is
expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions.
4.3 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical conditions,
and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in
Paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions.
4.4 Before submitting a Bid each Bidder will be responsible to make or obtain such
explorations, tests and data concerning physical conditions (surface, subsurface and
Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site, or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to
determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time,
price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct
such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.
Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations.
4.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for
access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work
are identified in the Contract Documents. Easements are to be obtained and paid for by
the Owner.
4.7 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract
Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing the Work.
5.
Interpretations and Addenda.
5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed
to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in
response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties
recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received
IB-2
C:\W1NOOWS\TEMPUNST .BIO. DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only
questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
5.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
Owner or Engineer.
6. Bid Security.
6.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of
ten percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or bank
check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.1 of the
General Conditions.
6.2 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon the Bid
security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required contract security within fifteen (15) days after the
Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that
Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to
have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the
earlier of the seventh (7th) day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixtieth
(60) day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will
be returned. Bid security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within
seven (7) days after the Bid opening.
7. Contract Time.
The numbers of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially
completed and also completed and ready for. final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in
the Bid Form and the Agreement.
8. Substitute or "Or Equal" Items.
The materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.
No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by
the Bidder and has been received by Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt
of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is
to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings,
cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A
statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment of Work that incorporation
of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the
proposed substitute is upon the Bidder. The Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval of
a proposed substitution shall be final. If Engineer approves any proposed substitution, such
IB-3
C:\W1NDOWS\ TEMP\JNST -BIO,OOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders. Bidders shall not
rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
9. Bid Form.
9.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be
obtained from Engineer (or the issuing office).
9.2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter.
9.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and
the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary.
The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.
9.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature.
9.5 All names must be typed or printed below the signature.
9.6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
9.7 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be
shown.
10. Submission of Bids.
Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to
Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and, if
applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and
address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If
the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system the sealed envelope shall be enclosed
in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
11. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids.
11.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
11.2 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed
and notarized written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the
reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the
IB-4
C:IW1NDOW$ITEl.1PUNST -BIO,QOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be
returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work
to be provided under the Contract Documents.
12. Opening of Bids.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract of
the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders
after the opening of Bids.
13. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance.
All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening,
but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to that
date.
14. Award of Contract.
14.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not
involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive,
unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make
an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsible or the Bidder is
unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard
or criteria established by Owner. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work
and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the.
indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in
favor of the correct sum.
14.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and
other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
14.3 Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be
submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner also may consider the
operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major
items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such
data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
14.4 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the
evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
18-5
C:\W1NDDWS\TEMP~NST -BIO.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
14.5 If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation
by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project.
14.6 If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of
Award within forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid opening.
15. Contract Security.
Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's
requirements as to performance and payment Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the
executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required performance and
payment Bonds.
16. Signing of Agreement.
When owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract
Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the
required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner with the
required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter Owner shall deliver one (1) fully signed
counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the
Drawings with appropriate identification.
18-6
C:\W1NOOWS\TEMP~NST -BIO,DOC
r,;;
--.'
....
,
..~
-
~
r.,;
--
F;;.
-.
,..
.
-I
"io
-.
-.
cl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.....,,; .......:......
REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS,
AND OTHER STATEMENTS OF BIDDERS
1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination:
a The bidder certifies that:
(1) The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently, without, for the purpose of
restricting competition, any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other
bidder or competitor relating to:
(a) those prices;
(b) the intention to submit a bid; or
( c) the methods or factors used to calculate the prices offered;
(2) The prices in this bid have not been and will not be knowingly disclosed by the bidder,
directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or competitor before bid opening (in the case
of a sealed bid solicitation) or contract award (in the case of a competitive proposal
solicitation) unless otherwise required by law; and '
(3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other concern to
submit or not to submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
b. Each signature on the bid is considered to be a certification by the signatory that the
signatory:
(1) Is the person in the bidder's organization responsible for determining the prices being
offered in this bid or proposal, and that the signatory has not participated and will not
participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs a(1) through a.(3) above; or
(2) (a) Has been authorized, in writing, to act as agent for the following principals in
certifying that those principals have not participated, and will not participate in any
action contrary to subparagraphs a (1) through a. (3) above.
Richard L. Horton, President
[Insert full name of person(s) in the bidde(s organization responsible for determining the prices offered in
this bid or proposal, and the title of his or her position in the bidde(s organization.]
-1-
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(b) As an authorized agent, does certify that the principals named in subdivision b.(2)(a)
above have not participated, and will not participate, in any action contrary to
subparagraphs a.(I) through a.(3) above; and
(c) As an agent, has not personally participated, and will not participate in any action
contrary to subparagraphs a. (1) through a. (3) above.
c. If the bidder deletes or modifies subparagraph (a) 2 above, the bidder must furnish with its
bid a signed statement setting forth in detail the circumstances of the disclosure.
d. Non-collusion affidavit. (Applicable to all contracts for construction and equipment.) Each
person, finn, or agency submitting a bid/proposal shall execute an affidavit, in the fonn
provided by Augusta-RiclUnond County, to the effect that he/she has not colluded with any
other person, firm or corporation in regard to any bid/proposal submitted in response to this
solicitation. In addition, at Augusta-Richmond County's determination, the bidder may be
required to submit a non-collusion affidavit for each ofhislher subcontractors.
2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement:
a. Definitions. As used in this provision:
"Bona fide employee" means a person, employed by a bidder and subject to the bidder's
supervision and control as to time, place, and manner of performance, who neither exerts,
nor proposes to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain contracts nor holds out as being
'able to obtain any contract(s) through improper influence.
"Improper influence" means any influence that induces or tends to induce an Owner or an
employee or officer to give consideration or to act regarding an Augusta-Richmond County
sponsored contract on any basis other than the merits of the matter.
b. The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid that, except for full-time bona fide
employees working solely for the bidder, the bidder:
(1) [ ] has, Gel has not employed or retained any person or company to solicit or obtain this
contract; and
(2) [ ] has, [XJ has not paid or agreed to pay to any person or company employed or retained
to solicit or obtain this contract any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other fee
contingent upon or resulting from the award of this contract.
c. If the answer to either b.(}) or b.(2) above is affirmative, the bidder shall make an immediate
and full written disclosure to Augusta-Richmond County.
-2-
I
I"
I
I
I
J 3.
.........
.J
_I
.
.1
.
.1
1
.1
-
~
.1
-
~I
~I
~I
I
I
I 4.
I
. ...... ......
..
d. Any misrepresentation by the bidder shall give Augusta-Richmond County the right to:
(1) tenninate the contract;
(2) at its discretion, deduct from contract payments the amount of any commission,
percentage, brokerage, or other contingent fee; or
(3) take other remedy pursuant to the contract.
Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal
Transactions (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000):
a The defInitions and prohibitions contained in Section 1352 of title 31, United States Code,
are hereby incorporated by reference in paragraph b of this certifIcation.
b. The bidder, by signing its bid, hereby certifies to the best of his or her knowledge and belief
as of June 2, 2000 that:
(1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member
of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress on his or her behalf in connection with the awarding of a contract resulting
from this solicitation;
(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including profit or fee received under
a covered Federal transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member
of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress on his or her behalf in connection with this solicitation, the bidder shall
complete and submit, with its bid, OMB standard fonn LLL, "Disclosure .of Lobbying
Activities;" and .
(3) He or she will include the language of this certification in all subcontracts at any tier and
require that all recipients of subcontract awards in excess of $1 00,000 shall certify and
disclose accordingly.
c. Submission of this certification and disclosure is a prerequisite for making or entering into
this contract imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, United States Code. Any person who makes
an expenditure prohibited under this provision or who fails to me or amend the disclosure
fonn to be filed or amended by this provision, shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less
than $10,000, and not more than $100,000, for each such failure.
Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification:
The bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief and except as otherwise
-3-
-'. -. -. .,.--" .- '.-" .. ".
1l'.y?l"VYl"&NJ,1U.~OCI"c."e--D_______ . ......-.... .
::. . ',. .. . :' ,! . . ,;: .. ,,:'" - .'~ :/ .,... ,;. . .;-: .' " '.' " . . -,
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
disclosed, he or she does not have any organizational conflict of interest which is defined as a
situation in which the nature of work to be performed under this proposed contract and the
bidder's organizational, financial, contractual, or other interests may, without some restriction
on future activities:
a. Result in an unfair competitive advantage to the bidder; or,
b. Impair the bidder's objectivity in performing the contract work.
[xl In the absence of any actual or apparent conflict, I hereby certify that to the best of my
knowledge and belief, no actual or apparent conflict of interest exists with regard to my
possible performance of this procurement.
5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility:
a. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief,
neither it, nor any person or firm which has an interest in the bidder's finn, nor any of the
bidder's subcontractors, is ineligible to:
(1) Be awarded contracts by any agency of the United States Government, HUD, the State
of Georgia, Augusta-Richmond County, or,
(2) Participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24.
b. The certification above is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed
when making award. If it is later determined that the bidder knowingly rendered an erroneous
certification, the contract may be terminated for default, and the bidder may be debarred or
suspended from participation in HUn programs and other Federal contract programs.
6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period:
a. "Acceptance period," as used in this provision, means the nwnber of calendar days available
to Augusta-Richmond County and the Owner for awarding a contract from the date specified
in this solicitation for receipt of bids.
b. This provision supersedes any language pertaining to the acceptance period that may appear
elsewhere in this solicitation.
c. Augusta-Richmond County requires a minimum acceptance period of sixty (60) calendar
days.
d. In the space provided immediately below, bidders may specify a longer acceptance period
than Augusta-Richmond County's minimum requirement.
The bidder allows the following acceptance period: 60
calendar days.
I.,
I.
I.
I.
'.
"
ii-
.
-I
-I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. A bid allowing less than Augusta-Richmond Cocnty's minimum acceptance period will be
rejected.
f. The bidder agrees to execute all that it has ~ to do, in compliance with its bid, if
that bid is accepted in writing within:
(I) The acceptance period stated in paragr3ph (e) above. or
(2) any longer acceptance period stated in ~~ "ill (d) above.
7. Small, Minority, Women-Owned Business C-OIlCU1l Representation:
The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid! offer that it:
a. [x] is, [ ] is not a small business concem. ~ business concern, II as used in this
provision, means a concern, including its ~ that is independently owned and
operated, not dominant in the field of opca:rion in v.mch it is bidding, and qualified as a
small business under the criteria and size ~ in 13 CFR 121.
b. [] is, [xl is not a women-owned business ~~ -Women-owned business enterprise,"
as used in this provision, means a business that is _least 51 percent owned by a woman or
women who are U.S. citizens and who also comrol and operate the business.
c. [] is, [x] is not a minority business enterprise.. ").~ business enterprise," as used in this
provision, means a business which is at least 51 pen::em owned or controlled by one or more
minority group members or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of
its voting stock is owned by one or more IlliJ:Jlority group members, and whose management
and daily operations are controlled by one 01" more mch individuals. For the purpose of this
definition, minority group members are: (Cbed: the block applicable to you)
[ ] Black Americans
[ ] A3iian Pacific Americans
[ ] Hispanic Americans
[ ] Asian Indian Americans
[ ] Native Americans
[ ] Hasidic Jewish Americans
8. Certification of Eligibility Under the DaYis-Bu:Ml Ad: (applicable to construction
contracts exceeding 52,000)
, .,
a. By the submission of this bid, the bidder CC'tiiies Iiw neither it nor any person or firm who
has an interest in the bidder's firm is a person <X E:rm ineligible to be awarded contracts by
the United States Government by virtue ofse-~,,'1n 3(3) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR
5.12(a)(I).
-5-
'.,..' "." ...,. .;....... . . .....#. ........',
l."042OOO21A1lM1N1SPECS'fronNlllpl8Sel'Gtions & CartIcIIons.dac.
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. No part of the contract resulting from this solicitation shall be subcontracted to any person
or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of
section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(I).
c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C.
1001.
9. Certification of Non-segregated Facilities (applicable to contracts exceeding $10,000)
a. The bidder's attention is caIled to the clause entitled Equal Employment OpPOrtunity of the
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
b. "Segregated facilities," as used in this provision, means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest
rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and
other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment
areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by
explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national
origin because of habit, local custom, or otherwise.
c. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that it does not and will not maintain or
provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it
does not and will not permit its employees to perfonn their services at any location under its
control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that a breach of this
certification is a violation of the Equal Employment OPPOrtunity clause in the contract.
d. The bidder further agrees that (except where it has obtained identical certifications from
proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) prior to entering into subcontracts which
exceed $10,000 and are not exempt from the requirements of the Equal Employment
Opportunity clause, it will:
(1) Obtain identical certifications from the proposed subcontractors;
(2) Retain the certifications in its files; and
(3) F oeward the foIJowing notice to the proposed subcontractors (except if the proposed
subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods):
Notice to Prospective Subcontractors of Requirement for Certifications of Non-segregated
Facilities
A Certification of Non-segregated Facilities must be submitted before the award of a subcontract
exceeding $ I 0,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Employment
OPPOrtunity clause of the prime contract. The certification may be submitted either for each
subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly, semiannually, or annually).
"
f
.
I
I
i
I
I
C
I
I
9
.
.
I
.
It
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Note: The penalty for making false statements in bids is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001..
10. Clean Air and Water Certification (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000)
The bidder certifies that:
a Any facility to be used in the performance of this contract:
[ ] is, [x] is not listed on the Environmental Protection Agency List of Violating Facilities:
b. The bidder will immediately notify Augusta-Richmond County before award, of the receipt
of any communication from the Administrator, or a designee, of the Environmental
Protection Agency, indicating that any facility that the bidder proposes to use for the
performance of the contract is under consideration to be listed on the EP A List of Violating
Facilities; and,
c. The bidder will include a certification substantially the same as this certification, including
this paragraph ( c), in every nonexempt subcontract.
11. Bidder's Signature:
1bis form must be submitted with the bid with all information completed. The bidder hereby certifies
that the information contained in these certifications and representations is accurate, complete, and
current Failure to submit this certification properly completed and executed will render the bidder
non-resPT~ive. I,'
,(') , j ~ -.
R',,'J. I I December 19, 2000
"
(Signature and Dale)
Richard L. Horton
(Typed or Printed Name)
President
(Tille)
Continental Construction Co., Inc.
(Company Name)
4190 Crosstowne Court, Evans" Ga. 30809
(Company Address)
706-860-3846
-7-
, .
1t'\42OOOMOM1MSPECS'Honfilecw-.... & ~doc
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Certification for Business Concerns Seeking Section 3
Preference in Contracting and Demonstration of Capability
Name of Business: Continental Construction Co..' rnc.
Address of Business: 4190 Crosstowne Court
Evans. Ga. 10809
Attached is the following documentation as evidence of status:
For business claiming status as a Section 3 resident-owned Enterprise:
Cl Copy of resident lease a Other Evidence
a Copy of evidence of participation
In a public assistance program
For the business entity as applicable:
o Copy of Articles of Incorporation
o Assumed Business Name Certificate
o List of owners/stockholders and % of each
o Organization chart with names and titles
and brief functional statement
a Additional documentation
o Certificate of Good Standing
o Partnership Agreement
o Corporation Annual Report
o Latest Board minutes appointing officers
For business claiming Section 3 status by subcontracting 25 percent of the dollar awarded
to qualified Section 3 business:
a List of subcontracted Section 3 business with corresponding certifications & subcontract amount
For business claiming Section 3 status. claiming at least 30 percent of their workforce are currently Section 3
residents, or were Section 3 eligible residents within 3 years of date of first employment with
the business:
o List of all current full time employees
o Residential lease (less than 3 years
from day of employment)
o List of all employees claiming Section 3 status
o Other evidence of Section 3 status (less than
3 years from date of employment)
Evidence of ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of the proposed contract
o Current financial statement 0 List of owned equipment
o Statement of ability to comply 0 List of all contracts for the past two years
with publiC policy
1~5eSident
(Aultlolizing 0fllcIaI- SkJnalure)
Attested by:
Name:
."--""'"
, 'x""""
'- ,~ t,li... ~\... i\:--' ) l " C'~::..~
(Corporate Seal)
Dianne Meese, Corporate Secretary
(Print)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NON-COLLUSION AFFlDA VIT
Note: Failure to submit this affidavit by that date specified in this solicitation may render the bid
non-responsive. No contract award will be made without a properly executed affidavit.
By submission of this bid or offer, each Vendor and each person signing on behalf of any Vendor certifies,
and, in the case of a joint bid or offer, each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of
perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief:
1. The prices in this quotation ha~e been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,
communications, or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to
such prices with any other bidder/offeror or with any competitor;
2. Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been offered in this bid/offer have not been
knowingly disclosed by the bidder/offeror and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder/offeror,
directly or indirectly to any other bidder/offeror or to any competitor;
3. ,No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder/offeror to include any other person,
partnership or corporation to submit or not to submit a bid/offer for the purpose of restricting
competition and,
4. No employee of Augusta-Richmond County or any elected or appointed official has received or will
receive any payment or any other form of financial compensation from the bidder/offeror as a result of
award of a contract or promise of award to the bidder/offeror.
Name: Name:
Signature:
Signature:
Title: Presiqent
Bidder/offeror, if the Bidder/offeror is an Individual
Partner, if the Bidder/offeror is a Partnership
Officer, if the Bidder/offeror is a Corporation
Title:
Bidder/offeror, if the Bidder/offeror is an Individual
Partner, if the Bidder/offeror is a Partnelship
Officer, if the Bidder/offeror is a Corporation
Company
Name: Continpnr;:l1 r.nn<=:rrll("t-i"n
Company
r" , In . Name:
Date:
Date:
December 19, 2000
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
r----.\, . J
\.1.. : i, '. 'l- : -Y\;~ :~,;} '--
f'<::.. -- '-..1... ~ d' '- _,
Dianne Meese
19
day of December
,20~.
My Commission expires
April 18
,20~.
-1-
K:"'2OOO2' -'OMlNISPECSlFronlWor>-collusion.doc:
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE I--DEFINITIONS
I
I
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other
Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings
indicated which are applicable to both the singular and
plural thereof:
I
Addenda- Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the
opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding
documents or the Contract Documents.
I
Agreement-- The written agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other
Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and
made a part thereof as provided therein.
I
Application for Payment-The form accepted by
ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in
requesting progress or fmal payments and which is to
include such supporting doaunentation as is required by the
Contract Documents.
I
I
Bid-The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the
prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be
performed.
I
Bonds-Bid, performance and payment bonds and other
instruments of security.
I
Change Order-A document recommended by ENGINEER,
which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and
authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work or
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract T~e
issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. '
I
I
Contract Documents-The Agreement, Addenda (which
pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the Bid and any
post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of
A ward) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the
Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary
Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same
are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together
with all amendments, modifications and supplements issued
pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement.
I
I
I
Contract Price- The moneys payable by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in
the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1
in the case of Unit Price Work).
I
I
Contract Tune- The number of days (computed as provided
in paragraph 17.2) or the date stated in the Agreement for
I
the Completion of the Work.
CONTRACTOR-- The person, firm or corporation with whom
OWNER has entered into the Agreement.
Defective-An adjective which when modifying the word Work
refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does
not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been
damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of fmal
payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been
assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance
with paragraph 14.X or 14.10).
Drawings-The drawings which show the character and scope of
the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or
approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract
Documents.
Effective Date of the Agreement-- The date indicated in the
Agreement on which it becomes effective, but ifno such date is
indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and
delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
ENGINEER- The person, firm or corporation named as such in
the Agreement.
Field Order-A written order issued by ENGINEER which
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph
9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Time.
General Requirements-Sections of Division I of the
Specifications.
Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Laws, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders.
Notice of A ward- The written notice by OWNER to the apparent
successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent
successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated
therein, within the time specified. OWNER will sign and deliver
the Agreement.
Notice to Proceed-A written notice given by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on
which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which
CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S
obligations under the Contract Documents.
OWNER-The public body or authority, corporation, association,
firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the
Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided.
Partial UtUization--Placing a portion of the Work in service for
K:\42000MDMINlSPECSY'ronf\1910,8,cIoc
I
I
the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose)
before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
I
Project--The total construction of which the Work to be
provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole,
or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Docwnents.
I
Resident Project Representative-- The authorized
representative of ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or
any part thereof.
I
Shop Drawings-All drawings, diagrams, illustrations,
schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the
Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules,
perfonnance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
infonnation prepared by a Supplier and submitted by
CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
I
I
I
I
SpecijicaJions- Those portions of the Contract Documents
consisting of written technical descriptions of materials,
equipment, construction systems, standards and
workmanship as applied to the Work and certain
administrative details applicable thereto.
I
Subcontractor-An individual, fmn or corporation having a
direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other
Subcontractor for the perfonnance of a part of the Work at
the cite.
I
I
Substantial Completion-The Work (or a specified part
thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of
ENGINEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive
certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently
complete, in accordance with the Contract Docwnents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the
purposes for which it is intended; or if there be no such
certificate issued, when imal payment is due in accordance
with paragraph 14.13. The tenns "substantially complete"
and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer
to Substantial Completion thereof.
I
I
Supplementary Cond/tions- The part of the Contract
Docwnents which amends or supplements these General
Conditions.
I
I
I
Supplier-A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor,
materialman or vendor.
I
Underground Facilities-All pipelines, conduits, ducts,
cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other
such facilities or attachments, and any encasements
containing such facilities which have been installed
underground to furnish any of the following services or
materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum
products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other
control systems or water.
Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit
prices .
Work-- The entire completed construction or the various
separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished
under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of
perfonning services, furnishing labor and furnishing and
incorporating materials and equipment into the construction,
all as required by the Contract Documents.
Work Directive Change--A written directive to
CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by
ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the
Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical
conditions under which the Work is to be perfonned as
provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under
paragraph 6.22. A Work Directive Change may not change
the Contract Price or the Contract Time, but is evidence that
the parties expect that the change directed or documented by
a Work Directive Change will be incorporated in a
subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by
the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or
Contract Time as provided in paragraph 10.2.
Written Amendment--A written amendment of the Contract
Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or
after the Effective Date of the Agreement and nonnally
dealing with the non engineering or nontechnical rather than
strictly Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2-PRELIMINARY MATTERS
Delivery of Bonds:
2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed
Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver
to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required
to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1.
Copies of Documents:
2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary
Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably
necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies
will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed:
2.3. The Contract Time will commence to run on the thirtieth
day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, if a Notice
2
K:\42OOO21ADM1MSPECranl\1810.8.doc:
I
I
I
I
to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to
Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time
within thirty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Time
commence to run later than the seventy-fifth day after the
day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective
Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.
Starting the Project:
2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perfonn the Work on
the date when the Contract Time commences to run, but
no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on
which the Contract Time commences to run.
I
I
Bifore Starting Construction:
2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work,
CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures shown
thereon and all applicable field measurements.
CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to
ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy which
CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before
proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however,
CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or
ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or
discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
I
I
I
I
I
2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review:
I
I
2.6.1. an estimated progress schedule indicating
the starting and completion dates of the various stages
of the Work
I
2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing
submissions; and
I
2.6.3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of
the Work which will include quantities and prices of
items aggregating the Contract Price and will
subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient
detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during construction. Such prices will include an
appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable
to each item of Work which will be confinned in
writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.
I
I
I
2.7. Before any Work at the site is started,
.
CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with a copy to
ENGINEER, certificates (and other evidence of insurance
requested by OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.3 and
5.4, and OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR certificates
(and other evidence of insurance requested by
CONTRACTOR) which OWNER is required to purchase and
maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
Preconstruction Conference:
2.8. Within twenty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement, but before CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the
site, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER
and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the schedules
referred to in paragraph 2.6, to discuss procedures for
handling Shop Drawings and other submittals and for
processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a
working understanding among the parties as to the Work.
Finalizing Schedules:
2.9. At least ten days before submission of the first
Application for Payment a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER and others as appropriate will
be held to fmalize the schedules submitted in accordance with
paragraph 2.6. The finalized progress schedule will be
acceptable to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression
of the Work to completion within the Contract Time, but such
acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility
for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve
CONTRACTOR from full responsibility there for. The
finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be
acceptable to ENGINEER as providing a workable
arrangement for processing the submissions. The finalized
schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to
fonn and substance.
ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
Intent:
3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire
agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR
concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are
complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if
called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed
in accordance with the law of the place of the Project.
3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Docwnents to describe
a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Docwnents. Any
Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred
from the Contract Docwnents as being required to produce
the intended result will be supplied whether or not
specifically called for. When words which have a wel~known
3
K:\420002IAOMIMSI'ECS'H181Q,8.doc
I
I
technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work,
materials or equipment such words shall be interpreted in
accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard
specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations
of any governmental authority, whether such reference be
specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard
specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in
effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective
Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as
may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no
provision of any referenced standard specification,
manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated
by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be
effective to change the duties and responsibilities of
OWNER. CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of
their consultants, agents or employees from those set
forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective
to assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's
consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or perfonnance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in
paragraph 9.4.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3. If, during the perfonnance of the Work,
CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report
to ENGINEER in writing at once and before proceeding
with the Work affected thereby shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER; however,
CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or
ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or
discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
I
I
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents:
3.4. The Contract Documents may be amended to
provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work
or to modify the tenns and conditions thereof in one or
more of the following ways:
I
3.4.1. a fonnal Written Amendment,
I
I
3.4.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph
10.4), or
3.4.3. a Work Directive Change (pursuant to
paragraph 10.1).
I
As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price
and Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order
or a Written Amendment.
3.5. In addition, the requirements of the Contract
Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of
the following ways:
3.5.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5),
3.5.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
3.5.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or
clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4).
Reuse of Documents:
3.6. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization perfonning or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract
with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership
rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other
documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing
the seal of ENGINEER; and they shall not reuse any of them
on extensions of the Project or any other project without
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific
written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.
ARTICLE ~A V AILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS: REFERENCE POINTS
A vailability of Lands:
4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract
Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be
perfonned, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,
and such other lands which are designated for the use of
CONTRACTOR. Easements for pennanent structures or
pennanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and
paid for by OWNER. unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any
delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or
easements entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension of the
Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for
as provided in Article 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for
all additional lands and access thereto that may be required
for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment.
Physical Conditions:
4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to
the Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in
4
K:\42OOll2\A1l1.1MSront.1910.adoc
I
I
preparation of the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in such reports, but not upon
nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions
contained therein or for the completeness thereof for
CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indicated in
the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph
4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.
I
I
I
4.2.2. Existing structures: Reference is made to the
Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface and subsurface structures (except
Underground Facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3)
which are at or contiguous to the site that have been
utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such
drawings, but not for the completeness thereof for
CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indicated in
the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph
4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to physical conditions in or relating to
such structures.
I
I
I
I
I
4.2.3. Report of Differing Conditions: If
CONTRACTOR believes that:
4.2.3.1. any technical data on which
CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in
paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is inaccurate, or
I
I
I
4.2.3.2. any physical condition uncovered or
revealed at the site differs materially from that
indicated, reflected or referred to in the Contract
Documents,
CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before perfonning any Work in connection
therewith (except in an emergency as pennitted by
paragraph 6.22), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in
writing about the inaccuracy or difference.
I
I
4.2.4. ENGINEER's Review: ENGINEER will
promptly review the pertinent conditions, detennine
the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or
tests with respect thereto and advise OWNER in
writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of
ENGINEER's findings and conclusions.
I
.
.
4.2.5. Possible Document Change: If ENGINEER
concludes that there is a material error in the Contract
Documents or that because of newly discovered
conditions a change in the Contract Documents is
.
required, a Work Directive Change or a Change Order will
be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and
document the consequences of the inaccuracy or
difference.
4.2.6. Possible Price and Time Adjustments: In each
such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or
an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any
combination thereof, will be allowable to the extent that
they are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference.
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to
the amount or length thereof, a claim may be made there
for as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities:
4.3.1. Shown or Indicated: The infonnation and data
shown or indicated in the Contract Docwnents with respect to
existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is
based on infonnation and data furnished to OWNER or
ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or
by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions:
4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be
responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
infonnation or data; and,
4.3.1.2. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
for reviewing and checking all such infonnation and data"
for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work
with the owners of such Underground Facilities during
construction, for the safety and protection thereof as
provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which
will be considered as having been included in the Contract
Price.
4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated. If an Underground Facility
is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which
was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and
which CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been
expected to be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly
after becoming aware thereof and before perfonning any
Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as pennitted
by paragraph 6.22), identify the owner of such Underground
Facility and give written notice thereof to that owner and to
OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review
the Underground Facility to detennine the extent to which the
Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence of the
Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be
amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During
such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety
5
K:\4~1a10,8.doc
I
I
and protection of such Underground Facility as provided
in paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time, or both, to the extent that they are
attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility
that was not shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not
reasonably have been expected to be aware of. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length
thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as
provided in Articles 11 and 12.
I
I
I
I
Reference Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to
establish reference points for construction, which in
ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the
Work (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established
reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written approval of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever
any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or
locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate
replacement or relocation of such reference points by
professionally qualified personnel.
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE S-BONDS AND INSURANCE
I
Performance and Other Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish perfonnance and
payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful perfonnance
and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under
the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in
effect at least until one year after the date when final
payment becomes due, except as otherwise provided by
Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds
shall be in the fonns prescribed by Law or Regulaion or
by the Contract Documents and be executed by such
sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties
on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring
Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by
the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury
Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be
accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act.
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by
I
CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent
or its right to do business is tenninated in any state where any
part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the
requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within
five days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both
of which must be acceptable to OWNER.
Contractor's Liability Insurance:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
comprehensive general liability and other insurance as is
appropriate for the Work being perfonned and furnished and
as will provide protection from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's
perfonnance and furnishing of the Work and
CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract
Documents, whether it is to be perfonned or furnished by
CONTRACTOR. by any Subcontractor, by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perfonn or furnish any
of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable:
5.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's
compensation, disability benefits and other similar
employee benefit acts;
5.3.2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
occupational sickness or disease, or death of
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.4. Claims for damages insured by personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (a) by any person as
a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the
employment of such person by CONTRACTOR., or (b) by
any other person for any other reason;
5.3.5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work
itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss ofuse resulting
therefrom;
5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or
Regulations for damages because of bodily injwy or death
of any person or for damage to property; and
5.3.7. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include the
specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits
6
K~lg1o.a,doc
I
I
of liability and coverages provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, or required by law, whichever is greater. The
comprehensive general liability insurance shall include
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of
insurance so required to be purchased and maintained (or
the certificates or other evidence thereof) shall contain a
provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will
not be cancelled, materially changed or renewal refused
until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been
given to OWNER and ENGINEER by certified mail. All
such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment
and at all times there aft when CONTRACTOR may be
correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with paragraph 13. I 2. In addition,
CONTRACTOR shall maintain such complete operations
insurance for at least two years after final pay me q and
furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such
insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contractual LlabUiIy Insurance:
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance
required by paragraph 5.3 will include contractual
liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR' s
obligations under paragraphs 6.30 and 6.31.
Owner's LlobUity Insurance:
5.5. OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance and, at
OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such
insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which
may arise from operations under the Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
I
I
Property Insurance:
5.6. Unless othelWise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the Work at the site to the full
insurable value thereof (subject to such deductible
amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This
insurance shall include the interests of OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER and
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall
be listed as insureds or additional insured parties, shall
insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage
and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss and
damage including theft, vandalism and malicious
mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other
perils as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and
expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured loss
or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals).
I
I
I
I
If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or othelWise
provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR
shall purchase and maintain similar property insurance on
portions of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit
when such portions of the Work are to be included in an
Application for Payment.
5 .7 . OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler
and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as
may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws
and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER.,
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER AND
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be
listed as insured or additional insured parties.
5.8. All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or
other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and
maintained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6
and 5.7 will contain a provision or endorsement that the
coverage afforded will not be cancelled or materially changed
or renewal refused until at least thirty days' prior written
notice has been given to CONTRACTOR by certified mai I
and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with
paragraph 5. I 1.2.
5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in the Work to the
extent of any deductible amounts that are provided in the
Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount, will be borne by CONTRACTOR,
Subcontractor or others suffering any such loss and if any of
them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of
such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the
purchaser's own expense.
5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance
policy, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance,
and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by
appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to
commencement of the Work at the site, OWNER shall in
writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other
insurance has been procured by OWNER.
Waiver of Rights:
5.1 I. I. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for all losses and damages caused by
any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance
provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 and any
other property insurance applicable to the Work, and also
waive all such rights against the Subcontractors,
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's consultants and all other
parties named as insureds in such policies for losses and
7
K:~1i10,adoc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
damages so caused. As required by paragraph 6.11,
each subcontract between CONTRACTOR and a
Subcontractor will contain similar waiver provisions
by the Subcontractor in favor of OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
consultants and all other parties named as insureds.
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights
that any of the insured parties may have to the
proceeds of insurance held by OWNER as trustee or
otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
5.11.2. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that
any policies provided in response to paragraphs 5.6
and 5.7 shall protect all of the parties insured and
provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. Accordingly, all
such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that
in the event of payment of any loss or damage the
insurer will have no rights of recovery against any of
the parties named as insureds or additional insureds,
and if the insurers require separate waiver fonns to be
signed by ENGINEER or ENGINEER's consultant
OWNER will obtain the same. and if such waiver
fonns are required of any Subcontractor,
CONTRACTOR will obtain the same.
Receipt and Application of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the
insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of
paragraph 5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate
account any money so received, and shall distribute it in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the
damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys
so received applied on account thereof and the Work and
the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order
or Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the
parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen
days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of
this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as
trustee shall make settlement with the insurers in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If required in writing by any party in interest,
OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an
insured loss, give bond for the proper perfonnance of
such duties.
I
I
.
Acceptance of Insurance:
5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage
afforded by or other provisions of the insurance required to be
purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance
with paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying
with the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify
CONTRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date
of delivery of such certificates to OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 2.7. If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the
coverage afforded by or other provisions of the policies of
insurance required to be purchased and maintained by
OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the
basis of their not complying with the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR shall notifY OWNER in writing thereof within
ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates to
CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2.7. OWNER
and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such
additional infonnation in respect of insurance provided by
each as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER
or CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection
within the time provided shall constitute acceptance of such
insurance purchased by the other as complying with the
Contract Documents.
Partial UtUil.ation-Property Insurance:
5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be
accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10; provided
that no
such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers
providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage
necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property
insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or
policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or
lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSmILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence:
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto
and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to
perfonn the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for
the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to
see that the finished Work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents.
8
K:I42OOO2IAIlMINlSPECS'FflllII\l91D.8.doc
I
I
I
I
I
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all
times during its progress a competent resident
superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written
notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under
extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall
have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All
communications given to the superintendent shall be as
binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent,
suitably qualified personnel to survey and layout the
Work and perfonn construction as required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times
maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except in
connection with the safety or protection of persons or the
Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and
except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
all Work at the site shall be perfonned during regular
working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not pennit
overtime work or the perfonnance of Work on Saturday,
Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written
consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume
full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone,
water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other
facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
perfonnance, testing, start-up and completion of the
Work.
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good
quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER,
CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence
(including reports of required tests) as to the kind and
quality of materials and equipment. All materials and
equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected,
used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the
instructions of the applicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no
provision of any such instructions will be effective to
assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's
consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or perfonnance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
.
.
I
.
-
.
Adjusting Progress Schedule:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.9)
adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact
thereon of new developments; these will confonn generally to
the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will
comply with any provisions of the General Requirements
applicable thereto.
Substitutes or "Or Equal" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified
or described in the Contract Documents by using the name
of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier
the naming of the item is intended to establish the type,
function and quality required. Unless the name is followed
by words indicating that no substitution is pennitted,
materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by ENGINEER if sufficient infonnation is submitted by
CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to detennine that
the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal
to that named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will include the following as supplemented in the General
Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of
material and equipment will not be accepted by
ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If
CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item
of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall make
written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof,
certifying that the proposed substitute will perform
adequately the functions and achieve the results called for
by the general design. be similar and of equal substance to
that specified and be suited to the same use as that
specified. The application will state that the evaluation
and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not
prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantia)
Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the
substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any
of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any
other direct contract with OWNER for work on the
Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and
whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in
connection with the Work is subject to payment of any
license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed
substitute from that specified will be identified in the
application and available maintenance, repair and
replacement service will be indicated. The application will
also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will
result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such
substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other
contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which
shall be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the
proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require
CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense
additional data about the proposed substitute.
9
K.~1910.a.doc
I
I
I
6.7.2. If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in
or required by the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute
means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of
construction acceptable to ENGINEER, if
CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to
allow ENGINEER to determine that the substitute
proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by
the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by
ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in
paragraph 6.7.1 as applied by ENGINEER and as may
be supplemented in the General Requirements.
I
I
I
I
6.7.3. ENGINEER wiII be allowed a reasonable
time within which to evaluate each proposed
substitute. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of
acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered,
installed or utilized without ENGINEER's prior
written acceptance which will be evidenced by either
a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing.
OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at
CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any
substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants in
evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR
and in making changes in the Contract Documents
occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER
accepts a proposed substitute, CONTRACTOR shall
reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants for evaluating each
proposed substitute.
I
I
I
I
I
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization (including those acceptable to OWNER
and ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2),
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom
OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonable
objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to
employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization to furnish or perform any of the Work
against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable
objection.
I
I
I
I
6.8.2. If the Supplementary Conditions require the
identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other
persons or organizations (including those who are to
furnish the principal items of materials and
equipment) to be submitted to OWNER in advance of
the specified date prior to the Effective Date of the
.
.
-
-
Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER
and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in
accordance with the Supplementary Conditions,
OWNER's or ENGINEER's acceptance (either in writing
or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date
indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding
documents or the Contract Documents) of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization so
identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable
objection after due investigation, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the
Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment
signed. No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any
such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of
OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work.
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to
OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations
performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or
indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as
CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall
create any contractual relationship between OWNER or
ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on
the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to payor to see to the
payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier
or other person or organization except as may otherwise be
required by Laws and Regulations.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall not control
CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors
or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any
specific trade.
6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a
Subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement
between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which
officially binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions as
required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay each
Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received
by CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies
issued pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and
royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
10
K:142OOOloA1l1.11MSCS'frlln61 elo.adoc
I
I
I
I
perfonnance of the Work or the incorporation in the
Work of any invention, design, process, product or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
others. If a particular invention, design, process, product
or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use
in the perfonnance of the Work and if to the actual
knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject
to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of
any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such
rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold
harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone directly
or indirectly employed by either of them from and against
all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including
attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out
of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights
incident to the use in the perfonnance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not
specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all
such claims in connection with any alleged infringement
of such rights.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Permits:
6.13. Unless othelWise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all
construction pennits and licenses. OWNER shall assist
CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such
penn its and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all
governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for
the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the
time of opening of Bids, or if there are no Bids on the
Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall
pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the
Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility
owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant
investment fees.
I
I
.
.
Laws and Regulations:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and perfonnance of the Work. Except
where othelWise expressly required by applicable
Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor
ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring
CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or
Regulations.
I
I
I
I
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that the
Specifications or Drawings are at variance with any
Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any
necessary changes will be authorized by one of the
methods indicated in paragraph 3.4. If
I
I
CONTRACTOR perfonns any Work knowing or having
reason to know that it is contrary to such Laws or
Regulations, and without such notice to ENGINEER,
CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom;
however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and
Regulations.
Taxes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use
and other similar taxes required to be paid by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and
Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable
during the perfonnance of the Work.
Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction
equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of workers to the Project site and land and areas
identified in and pennitted by the Contract Documents and
other land and areas pennitted by Laws and Regulations,
rights-of-way, penn its and easements, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with construction
equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR
shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such
land or area. or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any
land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the
perfonnance of the Work. Should any claim be made against
OWNER or ENGINEER by any such owner or occupant
because of the perfonnance of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party by
agreement or othelWise resolve the claim by arbitration or at
law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent pennitted by
Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER and
ENGINEER hannless from and against all claims, damages,
losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and
court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or
consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought
by any such other party against OWNER or ENGINEER to
the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's
perfonnance of the Work.
6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the work.
at the completion of the work CONTRACTOR shall remove
all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the
premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall
leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract
II
K:l42OOO2IAllMIN\ronI\le1o.a.doc
I
I
Documents.
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any
part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will
endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject
any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or
pressures that will endanger it.
Record Documents:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place
at the site one record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change
Orders, Work Directive Changes, Field Orders and
written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant
to paragraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all
changes made during construction. These record
documents together with all approved samples and a
counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be
available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion
of the Work, these record documents, samples and Shop
Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER.
I
Safety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection
to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.20.1. all employees on the Work and other
persons and organizations who may be affected
thereby;
6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment
to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the site; and
6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent
thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and
Underground Facilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of
construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws
and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction
for the safety of persons or property or to protect them
from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain
all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property
and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
I
.
-
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage,
injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.20.2
or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any
of them to perform or furnish any of the Work: or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the
fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions
of OWNER or ENGINEER or anyone employed by either of
them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part,
to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR).
CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety
and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as
all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a
notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with
paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial
Completion).
6.21. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible
representative at the site whose duty shall be the prevention
of accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's
superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
Emergencies:
6.22. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of
persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto,
CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization
from ENGINEER or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent
threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR
believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations
from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If
ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract
Documents is required because of the action taken in response
to an emergency, a Work Directive Change or Change Order
will be issued to document the consequences of the changes
or variations.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements
and after complying with applicable procedures specified in
the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see
paragraph 2.9), or for other appropriate action jf so indicated
in the Supplementary Conditions, five copies (unless
otherwise specified in the General Requirements) of all Shop
Drawings, which will bear a stamp or specific written
indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied
CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract
12
It"l42OOOZlADNlN\5PECSlfronf.l ilo,acloc
I
I
Documents with respect to the review of the submission.
All submissions will be identified as ENGINEER may
require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be
complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, materials and similar
data to enable ENGINEER to review the information as
required.
I
I
I
I
6.24. CONTRACTOR shall also submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval with such
promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples
required by the Contract Documents. All samples will
have been checked by and accompanied by a specific
written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied
CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract
Documents with respect to the review of the submission
and will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier,
pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for
which intended.
I
I
6.25.1. Before submission of each Shop Drawing
or sample CONTRACTOR shall have determined and
verified all quantities, dimensions, specified
performance criteria, installation requirements,
materials, catalog numbers and similar data with
respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each
Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings
and samples and with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
6.25.2. At the time of each submission,
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific
written notice of each variation that the Shop
Drawings or samples may have from the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall
cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop
Drawing submitted to ENGINEER for review and
approval of each such variation.
I
I
I
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve with
reasonable promptness Shop Drawings and samples, but
ENGINEER's review and approval will be only for
conformance with the design concept of the Project and
for compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents and shall not extend to means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures of construction
(except where a specific means, method, technique,
sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and
approval of a separate item as such will not indicate
approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by
ENGINEER, and shall return the required number of
I
I
I
-
corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required
new samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals.
6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop
Drawings or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing
called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the
time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and
ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation
by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; nor will
any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or
from responsibility for having complied with the provisions
of paragraph 6.25.].
6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the
Specifications, any related Work performed prior to
ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent
submission will be the sole expense and responsibility of
CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carty on the Work and adhere
to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements
with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed
pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except
as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
IndemnifICation:
6.30. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harm-
less OWNER and ENGINEER and their consultants, agents
and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses
and expenses, direct, indirect or consequential (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the
Work, such claim, damage, loss or expense (a) is attributable
to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)
including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused
in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or
organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them
to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not
it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder or arises
by or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless of the
negligence of any such party.
13
K:\420002IAOMIN\SPECS\FronII 1910,8,doc
I
I
I
6.31. In any and all claims against OWNER or
ENGINEER or any of their consultants, agents or
employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable, the indemnification obligation under
paragraph 6.30 shall not be limited in any way by any
limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for
CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor or other
person or organization under workers' or workmen's
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other
employee benefit acts.
I
I
I
I
6.32. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under
paragraph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's consultants, agents or
employees arising out of the preparation or approval of
maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change
Orders, designs or specifications.
I
I,
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK
I
Related Work at Site:
7.1. OWNER may perfonn other work related to the
Project at the site by OWNER's own forces, have other
work perfonned by utility owners or let other direct
contracts there for which shall contain General
Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other
work is to be perfonned was not noted in the Contract
Documents, written notice thereof will be given to
CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work;
and, if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance
will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or
requires additional time and the parties are unable to
agree as to the extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make
a claim there for as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner
and other contractor who is a party to such a direct
contract (or OWNER, if OWNER is performing the
additional work with OWNER's employees) proper and
safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for
the introduction and storage of materials and equipment
and the execution of such work, and shall properly
connect and coordinate the Work with theirs.
CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching
of the Work that may be required to make its several
parts come together properly and integrate with such
other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work
of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their
work and will only cut or alter their work with the written
consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be
affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR
under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners
and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable
provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct
contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other
contractors.
7.3. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of any such other
contractor or utility owner (or OWNER), CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing
any delays, defects or deficiencies in such work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. CONTRACTOR's failure so to report will constitute
an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for
integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or
non-apparent defects and deficiencies in the other work.
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance
of other work on the Project at the site, the person or
organization who will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various prime
contractors will be identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, and the specific matters to be covered by such
authority and responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of
such authority and responsibilities will be provided, in the
Supplementary Conditions. Unless otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER
shall have any authority or responsibility in respect of such
coordination.
ARTICLE 8--0WNER'S RESPONSmILITIES
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communications to
CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of
ENGINEER, OWNER shaH appoint an engineer against
whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection,
whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of
the fonner ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such
appointment shall be subject to arbitration.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER
under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make
payments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as
provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and
easements and providing engineering surveys to establish
14
K:\420002\AOMIN\SPECS\FronIIl910,8.doc
I
I
I
I
I
reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4.
Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifYing and making
available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site
and in existing structures which have been utilized by
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and
Specifications.
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of
purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8.
I
I
I
8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders
as indicated in paragraph 10.4.
8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain
inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph
13.4.
8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work
or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13. 1 0 and 15. 1.
Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate
services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.
I
I
ARTICLE 9-ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
I
I
Owner's Representative:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative
during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of
ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and
shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER
and ENGINEER.
I
Visits to Site:
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at
intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction
to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work
and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER
will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous
on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward
providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence
that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site
observations as an experienced and qualified design
professional, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed
of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard
OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work.
I
I
I
I
.
.
Project Representation:
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will
furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
ENGINEER in observing the performance of the Work. The
duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such
Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER
designates another agent to represent OWNER at the site who
is not ENGINEER's agent or employee, the duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other
person will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness
such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of
Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably
inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents.
If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or
interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may
make a claim there for as provided in Article II or Article 12.
Authorized Variations in Work:
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the
Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents
which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or
the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of
the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a
Field Order and will be binding on OWNER, and also on
CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of
the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim
there for as provided in Article 11 or 12.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or
reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective. and
will also have authority to require special inspection or testing
of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the
Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for
Shop Drawings and samples, see paragraphs 6.23 through
6.29 inclusive.
9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities as
to Change Orders, see Articles 10, II and 12.
15
K:\42OOO21AD1.UN\SPECS\FIori61910,a,dot
I
I
9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities
in respect of Applications for Payment, etc., see Article
]4.
1
Determinations for Unit Prices:
9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual
quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review
with CONTRACTOR ENGINEER's preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written
decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application
for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written
decisions thereon will be final and binding upon
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days
after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or
CONTRACTOR delivers to the other party to the
Agreement and to ENGINEER written notice of intention
to appeal from such a decision.
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
Decisions on Disputes:
9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes
and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work
or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing
of the Work and claims under Articles 1] and 12 in
respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with
a request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph, which ENGINEER will render in writing
within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such
claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by the
claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the
Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty
days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto,
and written supporting data will be submitted to
ENGINEER and the other party within sixty days after
such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support
of the claim.
I
I
1
I
I
I
9. ]2. When functioning as interpreter and judge
under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not
show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will
9. ]6. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts
or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization
performing or furnishing any of the Work.
ARTICLE IO-CHANGES IN THE WORK
.
-
-
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without
not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a
decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.] 0 and 9. ] 1
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except
any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of
final payment as provided in paragraph ] 4.16) will be a
condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or
Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter.
Limitations on ENGINEER's Responsibilities:
9.]3. Neither ENGINEER's authority to act under this
Article 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any
decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR. any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or
organization performing any of the Work, or to any surety for
any of them.
9.14. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as
ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as
approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the
adjectives" "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper"
or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used
to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of
ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such
requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to
evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract
Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating
otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be
effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work
or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary
to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
9.15. ENGINEER will not be responsible for
CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, and ENGINEER will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or
furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from
time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work; these will be authorized by a Written Amendment,
a Change Order, or a Work Directive Change. Upon receipt
of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved which will be performed
under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as otherwise specifically provided).
16
K:1420002'ADMlMSl'ECS'Ftonl\1810,8.doc:
I
I
I
I
I
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to
agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or decrease in
the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the
Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work
Directive Change, a claim may be made there for as
provided in Article 11 or Article 12
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work perfonned that is
not required by the Contract Documents as amended,
modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4
and 3.5, except in the case of an emergency as provided in
paragraph 6.22 and except in the case of uncovering Work
as provided in paragraph 13.9.
I
I
I
10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute
appropriate Change Orders (or Written Amendments)
covering:
10.4.1. changes in the Work which are ordered by
OWN ER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, are required
because of acceptance of defective Work under
paragraph 13 .13 or correcting detective Work under
paragraph 13.14, or are agreed to by the parties;
I
I
I
I
10.4.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
10.4. 3 . changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph
9.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such
Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such
decision in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal,
CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to
the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29.
I
I
10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope
of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract
Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given
to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be
CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each
applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
I
I
I
ARTICLE ll-CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
I
II. I. The Contract Price constitutes the total
compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to CONTRACTOR for perfonning the Work. All duties,
.
responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken
by CONTRACTOR shall be at his expense without change
in the Contract Price.
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a
Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for
an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based
on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no
event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature
of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after
such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of
the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written
statement that the amount claimed covers all known
amounts (direct, indirect and consequential) to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said
event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall
be detennined by ENGINEER in accordance with
paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot
otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph I 1.2.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following
ways:
11.3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of unit prices to the quantities of the items
involved (subject to the provisions of paragraphs 11.9.1.
through 1 1.9.3, inclusive).
11.3.2. By mutual acceptance ofa lump sum (which
may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with paragraph 11.6.2.1).
11.3.3. On the basis of the Cost of the Work
(detennined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5)
plus a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit
(determined as provided in paragraphs 11.6 and 11.7).
Cost of the Work:
11.4. The tenn Cost of the Work means the sum of all
costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in
the proper perfonnance of the Work. Except as otherwise
may be agreed to in writing by OWNER. such costs shall be
in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project, shall include only the following items and shall
not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5:
17
K:142OOO2\A1MMSPECSronlIl gl o,a,doc
I
I
I
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct
employ of CONTRACTOR in the perfonnance of the
Work. under schedules of job classifications agreed upon
by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for
employees not employed full time on the Work shall be
apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the
Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to,
salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which
shall include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or
workmen's compensation, health and retirement
benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. Such employees shall include
superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of
perfonning Work after regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in
the above to the extent authorized by OWNER.
transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of
CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge
of duties connected with the Work.
I
I
11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and
maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office and temporary
facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the
workers, which are consumed in the perfonnance of
the Work, and cost less market value of such items
used but not consumed which remain the property of
CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
I
11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work, including costs of
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field
services required in connection therewith. All cash
discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless
OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with
which to make payments, in which case the cash
discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts,
rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus
materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and
CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may
be obtained.
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment
and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented
from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with
rental agreements approved by OWNER with the
advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of
transportation, loading, unloading, installation,
dismantling and removal thereof-all in accordance
with tenns of said rental agreements. The rental of
any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the
Work.
I
11.4.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes
related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR
is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
I
I
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the
Subcontractors for Work perfonned by Subcontractors.
If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain
competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to
CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER
who will then detennine, with the advice of
ENGINEER, which bids will be accepted. If a
subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid
on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the
Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be detennined in
the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the
Work. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other
provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as
applicable.
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than
negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,
and royalty payments and fees for penn its and
licenses.
I
I
I
11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related
expenses), not compensated by insurance or
otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by
CONTRACTOR in connection with the perfonnance
and furnishing of the Work (except losses and
damages within the deductible amounts of property
insurance established by OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 5.9), provided they have resulted from
causes other than the negligence of CONTRACfOR,
any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of
them may be liable. Such losses shall include
settlements made with the written consent and
approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and
expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work
for the purpose of detennining CONTRACTOR's
Fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires
reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in
I
I
I
11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but
not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories,
surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for
services specifically related to the Work.
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following:
18
K:\420002lADMlNISPECSV'ronl\1910,a,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for
services a fee proportionate to that stated in
paragraph] 1.6.2.
] 1.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
]] .4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams,
long distance telephone calls, telephone service at
the site, express age and similar petty cash items in
connection with the Work.
] 1.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds
and insurance required because of changes in the
Work and premiums for property insurance
coverage within the limits of the deductible
amounts established by OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 5.9.
] 1.5. The tenn Cost of the Work shall not include any of
the following:
I] .5. ]. Payroll costs and other compensation of
CON TRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of
partner ship and sole proprietorships), general managers,
engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors.
accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,
expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel
employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in
CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for
general administration of the Work and not specifically
included in the agreed upon schedule of job
classifications referred to in par a graph I] .4.1 or
specifically covered by paragraph ]] .4.4 all of which
are to be considered administrative costs covered by the
CONTRACTOR's Fee.
11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and
branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the
site
] 1.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital
expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S
capital employed for the Work and charges against
CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all
insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by
the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the
same (except for the cost of premiums covered by sub
paragraph I] .4.5.9 above).
I] .5.5. Costs due to the negligence of
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts
any of them may be liable, including but not limited to,
the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials
or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any
damage to property.
I] .5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of
any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and
expressly included in paragraph ] 1.4.
CONTRACTOR'S Fee:
I] .6. The CONTRACTOR's Fee allowed to
CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be
detennined as follows:
] ] .6.]. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if none
can be agreed upon,
] ] .6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of
the various portions of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2. ]. for costs incurred under paragraphs
] ].4.] and ] ] .4.2, the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be
fifteen percent;
] ] .6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph
] 1.4.3, the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be five
percent; and if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost
of the Work Plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to
CONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit
of all Subcontractors shall be fifteen percent;
] ] .6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of
costs itemized under paragraphs ] ] .4.4, ] 1.4.5 and
] 1.5:
11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change
which results in a net decrease in cost will be the
amount of the actual net decrease plus a deduction in
CONTRACTOR's Fee by an amount equal to ten
percent of the net decrease: and
I] .6.2.5. when both additions and credits are
involved in anyone change, the adjustment in
CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be computed on the
basis of the net change in accordance with
paragraphs ] ] .6.2.] through ] ] .6.2.4. inclusive.
] 1.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be
detennined pursuant to paragraph IIA or ] 1.5,
CONTRACTOR will submit in fonn acceptable to
ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with
supporting data.
19
K:\42OOO21A01.11N\SPECS'FronI\lil0,8,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cash Allowances:
11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered
to be done by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for
such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be
acceptable to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that:
11.8.1. The allowances include the cost to
CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of
materials and equipment required by the allowances to
be delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes: and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and
handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the
allowances have been included in the Contract Price and
not in the allowances. No demand for additional
payment on account of any thereof will be valid.
Prior to fmal payment, an appropriate Change Order will be
issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual
amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered
by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
I
Unit Price Work:
11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that
all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the
established unit prices for each separately identified
item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of
each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated
quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not
guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison
of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.
Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in
accordance with Paragraph 9.10.
I
I
I
I
I
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate
to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each
separately identified item.
I
I
11.9.3. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such
item indicated in the Agreement and there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item
of Work and if CONTRACTOR believes that
I
.
CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a
result thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an
increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article
II if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of
any such increase.
ARTICLE 12-CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a
Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an
extension or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based
on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no
event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature
of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after
such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of
the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's
written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All
claims for adjustment in the Contract Time 24 shall be
determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph
9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise
agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will
be valid if not submitted in accordance with the
requirements of this Paragraph 12.1.
12.2. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount
equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of
CONTRACTOR if a claim is made there for as provided in
paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall include, but not be
limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER or others performing
additional work as contemplated by Article 7, or to fires,
floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnonnal weather
conditions or acts of God.
12.3. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this
Article 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and
arbitration costs) for delay by either party.
20
K:\420002IAOMIMSPECS'Ftonl\lal0,e,dOc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 13- WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE;
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to
OWNER and ENGINEER that all Work will be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be
defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to
CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in
place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in
this Article 13 .
Access to Work:
13.2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's representatives,
other representatives of OWNER, testing agencies and
governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Work at reasonable times for their
observation, inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall
provide proper and safe conditions for such access.
Tests and Inspections:
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely
notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests or approvals.
13.4. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereot) to
specifically be inspected, tested or approved.
CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility there for,
pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish
ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, testing
or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for
and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or
testing required in connection with OWNER's or
ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials or
equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of
materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to
CONTRACTOR's purchase thereoffor incorporation in the
Work. The cost of all inspections, tests and approvals in
addition to the above which are required by the Contract
Documents shall be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise
specified).
13.5. All inspections, tests or approvals other than those
required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction shall be perfonned by organizations acceptable
to OWNER and CONTRACTOR (or by ENGINEER ifso
specified) .
13.6. If any Work (including the work of others) that is
to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without
written concurrence of ENGINEER. it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. Such
uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless
CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of
CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and
ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in
response to such notice.
13.7. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor
inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve
CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's obligations to
perfonn the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Uncovering Work:
13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written
request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation
and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable
that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected
or tested by others, CONTRACTOR. at ENGINEER's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available
for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may
require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all
necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that
such Work is defective. CONTRACTOR shall bear all
direct, indirect and consequential costs of such uncovering,
exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of
satisfactory reconstruction, (including but not limited to
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and
other professionals), and OWNER shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may
make a claim there for as provided in Article 11. If,
however, such Work is not found to be defective.
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or
both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction: and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent
thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as
provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Owner May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to furnish or perfonn the Work in such
a way that the completed Work will confonn to the
Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR
to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for
such order has been eliminated; however, this right of
OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on
21
K:\420002WlMI~lg10,e.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of
CONTRACTOR or any other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the
Work has been rejected by ENGINEER. remove it from the
site and replace it with non defective Work.
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs of such correction or removal
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals) made
necessary thereby.
One Year Correction Period:
13.12. If within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any
applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract
Documents, any Work is found to be defective,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER
and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions,
either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been
rejected by OWNER. remove it from the site and replace it
with non defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not
promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in
an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss
or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work
corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and
all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal
and replacement (including but not limited to fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special
circumstances where a particular item of equipment is
placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion
of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start
to run from an earlier date if so provided in the
Specifications or by Written Amendment.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to
ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, also
ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so.
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs attributable to OWNER's evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such
costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness
and to include but not be limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If
any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's
recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
I
I
Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
thereof, OWNER may make a claim there for as provided
in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such
recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER May Correct Defective Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time
after written notice of ENGINEER to proceed to correct
and to correct defective Work or to remove arid replace
rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance
with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any
other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may,
after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR. correct
and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights
and remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed
expeditiously. To the extent necessary to complete
corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude
CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession
of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's
services related thereto, take possession of
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for
which OWN ER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are
stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER,
OWNER's representatives, agents and employees such
access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All
direct, indirect and consequential costs of OWNER in
exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to
reasonableness by ENGINEER, and a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
thereof, OWNER may make a claim there for as provided
in Article 11. Such direct, indirect and consequential costs
will include but not be limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all
court and arbitration costs and all costs of repair and
replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's
defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an
extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by
OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder.
22
K:142OOOMOM1N1SPECSronl\lilo.'.doc:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 14- PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
Schedule of Values:
14. I. The schedule of values established as provided in
paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments
and will be incorporated into a form of Application
for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress
payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed.
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2. At least twenty days before each progress payment
is scheduled (but not more often than once a month),
CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by
CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the
date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another
location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment
shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other
documentation warranting that OWNER has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges,
security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter
in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to
protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be
satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retain age with
respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
AgT$:ement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the
Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time
of payment free and clear of all Liens.
I
I
Review of Applications for Progress Payment:
14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR
indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. Ten days after presentation of the Application
for Payment with ENGINEER's recommendation, the
amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of the
I
-
.
-
II
last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due
will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's o~site observations of the Work in progress
as an experienced and qualified design professional and on
ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and
the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of
ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief, the
quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a
functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion,
to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the
Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities
and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph
9. I 0, and to any other qualifications stated in the
recommendation); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to
payment of the amount recommended. However, by
recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not
thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or
continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the
quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the
responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the
Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters
or issues between the parties that might entitle
CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or
OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR.
14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment
will constitute an additional representation by ENGINEER
to OWNER that the conditions precedent to
CONTRACTOR's being entitled to final payment as set
forth in paragraph 14.13 have been fulfilled.
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it
would be incorrect to make such representations to
OWNER. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any
such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered
evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests,
nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such
extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to
protect OWNER from loss because:
14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work
has been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by
Written Amendment or Change Order,
23
K:\420002IAOIolINISPECSlFrord\l al0,8.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct
defective Work or complete Work in accordance with
paragraph 13.14, or
14.7.4. of ENGINEER's actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.9 inclusive.
OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount
recommended by ENGINEER because claims have been
made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's
performance or furnishing of the Work or Liens have been
filed in connection with the Work or there are other items
entitling OWNER to a set-off against the amount
recommended, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR
immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER)
stating the reasons for such action.
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work
is substantially complete (except for items specifically
listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that
ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shaH make an inspection
of the Work to determine the status of completion. If
ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially
complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in
writing giving the reasons there for. If ENGINEER
considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER
will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate
of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of
Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the
certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven
days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to
make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions
of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such
objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not
substantially complete, ENGINEER will within fourteen
days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER
notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons there
for. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections,
ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete,
ENGINEER will within said fourteen days execute and
deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive
certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised
tentative list of items to be completed or corrected)
reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as
ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any
objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the
tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER
.
will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written
recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending
fmal payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with
respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive
certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's
aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and
CONTRACTOR until final payment.
14.9. OWNER shaIl have the right to exclude
CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of
Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct
items on the tentative list.
Partial Utilization:
14.10. Use by OWNER of any finished part of the
Work, which has specificaIly been identified in the Contract
Documents, or which OWNER, ENGINEER and
CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning
and use able part of the Work that can be used by OWNER
without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's
performance of the remainder of the Work, may be
accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work subject to the following:
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request
CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use
any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to
be ready for its intended use and substantiaIly complete.
If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify
to OWN ER and ENGINEER that said part of the Work
is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part
of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that
CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and
request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Within a
reasonable time after either such request, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an
inspection of that part of the Work to determine its
status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider
that part of the Work to be substantia1\y complete,
ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR
in writing giving the reasons there for. If ENGINEER
considers that part of the Work to be substantia1\y
complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9
will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
24
K:1420002WlMINISPECS\F~l&lQ,a,doc '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
]4.10.2. OWNER may at any time request
CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to take
over operation of any such part of the Work although it
is not substantially complete. A copy of such request
will be sent to ENGINEER and within a reasonable time
thereafter OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER
shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to
detennine its status of completion and will prepare a list
of the items remaining to be completed or corrected
thereon before final payment. If CONTRACTOR does
not object in writing to OWNER and ENGINEER that
such part of the Work is not ready for separate operation
by OWNER, ENGINEER will finalize the list of items
to be completed or corrected and will deliver such list to
OWNER and CONTRACTOR together with a written
recommendation as to the division of responsibilities
pending final payment between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation,
safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and
guarantees for that part of the Work which will become
binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time
when OWNER takes over such operation (unless they
shall have otherwise agreed in writing and so informed
ENGINEER). During such operation and prior to
Substantial Completion of such part of the Work,
OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access
to complete or correct items on said list and to complete
other related Work.
]4.10.3. No occupancy or separate operation of part
of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance
with the requirements of paragraph 5.] 5 in respect of
property insurance.
Final Inspection:
]4.]]. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that
the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing
of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the
Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall
immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy
such deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such
corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up
record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.] 9) and other
documents-all as required by the Contract Documents, and
after ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable
(subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16),
CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment
.
following the procedure for progress payments. The final
Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all
documentation called for in the Contract Documents,
together with complete and legally effective releases or
waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of
or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu thereof and as
approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish
receipts or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR
that the releases and receipts include all labor, services,
material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and
that all payrolls, material and equipment bills. and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER
or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible,
have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the
surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or
Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full,
CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any
Lien.
Final Payment and Acceptance:
]4.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of
the Work during construction and final inspection, and
ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying docurnentation--all as required by the
Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other
obligations under the Contract Documents have been
fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing
ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the
Application to OWNER for payment. Thereupon
ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the
provisions of paragraph ]4. ]6. Otherwise, ENGINEER
will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating
in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty
days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and
accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and
substance, and with ENGINEER's recommendation and
notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by
ENGINEER will become due and will be paid by OWNER
to CONTRACTOR.
] 4.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final
completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of
CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and
recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not
25
K:142000MDMI'lISPECS'i'rorlIliIO.a,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
fully completed or corrected is less than the retain age
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been
furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent
of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the
Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made
under the terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
Contractor's Continuing Obligation:
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of
any progress or final payment by ENGINEER, nor the
issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any
payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the
Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work
or any part thereof by OWNER. nor any act of acceptance
by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review and
approval of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the
issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER
pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nor any correction of defective
Work by OWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release
of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents (except as
provided in paragraph 14.16).
Waiver of Claims:
14.16. The making and acceptance of final payment
will constitute:
14.16.1. a waiver of all claims by OWNER against
CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled
Liens, from defective Work appearing after final
inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.1 I or from failure
to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of
any special guarantees specified therein; however, it will
not constitute a waiver by OWNER of any rights in
respect of CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations
under the Contract Documents; and
14.16.2. a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER other than those previously made in
writing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15- SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINA TION
Owner May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may, at any time and without cause,
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not
.
-
more than ninety days by notice in writing to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date
on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall
resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR
shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly
attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an
approved claim there for as provided in Articles II and 12.
Owner May Terminate:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the
following events:
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary
case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title
11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or
if CONTRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar
action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other
federal or state law in effect at such time relating to the
bankruptcy or insolvency;
15.2.2. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR
under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or
hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a petition is
filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief
against CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state
law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or
insolvency;
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general
assignment for the benefit of creditors;
15.2.4. if a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of
CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law or
under contract, whose appointment or authority to take
charge of property of CONTRACTOR is for the purpose
of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the
purpose of general administration of such property for
the benefit of CONTRACTOR's creditors;
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an
inability to pay its debts generally as they become due:
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to
supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule
established under paragraph 2.9 as revised from time to
time);
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
26
1t142llOO2\A1lM1N\SPECS'Honl\l il D.a.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority
of ENGINEER; or
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any
substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents:
OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the
surety, if there be one) seven days' written notice and to the
extent pennitted by Laws and Regulations, tenninate the
services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR
from the site and take possession of the Work and of all
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the
full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without
liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored
at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR
but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as
OWNER may deem expedient. In such case
CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further
payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of
the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and
consequential costs of completing the Work (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs) such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. Ifsuch
costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall
pay the difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by
OWNER will be approved as to reasonableness by
ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order, but when
exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph
OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for
the Work perfonned.
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so
tenninated by OWNER, the tennination will not affect any
rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR
then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention
or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER
will not release CONTRACTOR from liability.
1 SA. Upon seven days' written notice to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without
cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy,
elect to abandon the Work and tenninate the Agreement. In
such case. CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work
executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable
tennination expenses, which will include, but not be limited
to, direct, indirect and consequential costs (including, but
not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs).
.
.
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:
15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the
Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by
OWN ER or under an order of court or other public
authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for
Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or OWNER
fails for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any swn finally
detennined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon
seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER,
tenninate the Agreement and recover from OWNER
payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained
plus reasonable tennination expenses. In addition and in
lieu oftenninating the Agreement, if ENGINEER has failed
to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER has failed
to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may
upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all amounts
then due. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 6.29 to
cany on the Work in accordance with the progress schedule
and without delay during disputes and disagreements with
OWNER.
{The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally)
27
K:\420002lADMlN\SPECS'FronlIli10.8,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 16-ARBITRATION
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question
between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of, or
relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof
(except for claims which have been waived by the making
or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph
14.16) will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the
Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American
Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the
limitations of this Article 16. This agreement so to arbitrate
and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into
in accordance herewith as provided in this Article 16 will
be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any
court having jurisdiction.
16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute or
other matter that is required to be referred to ENGINEER
initially for decision in accordance with paragraph 9. II will
be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which
ENGINEER has rendered a decision or (b) the tenth day
after the parties have presented their evidence to
ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by
ENGINEER before that date. No demand for arbitration of
any such claim, dispute or other matter will be made later
than thirty days after the date on which ENGINEER has
rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance
with paragraph 9.11; and the failure to demand arbitration
within said thirty days' period shall result in ENGINEER's
decision being final and binding upon OWNER and
CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a decision after
arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision
may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the
arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is
acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand for
arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER rendered
in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than
ten days after the party making such demand has delivered
written notice of intention to appeal as provided in
paragraph 9.10.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed
in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with
the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be
sent to ENGINEER for infonnation. The demand for
arbitration will be made within the thirty-day or ten-day
period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all
other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute
or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall
any such demand be made after the date when institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute
or other matter in question would be barred by the
applicable statute of limitations.
.
16.4. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the
Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder
or in any other manner any other person or entity (including
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's agents, employees or
consultants) who is not a party to this contract unless:
16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity
is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among
those who are already parties to the arbitration,
16.4.2. such other person or entity is substantially
involved in a question of law or fact which is common
to those who are already parties to the arbitration and
which will arise in such proceedings, and
16.4.3. The written consent of the other person or
entity sought to be included and of OWNER and
CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion,
which consent shall make specific reference to this
paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent
to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in
such consent or to arbitration with any party not
specifically identified in such consent.
16.5. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be
final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having
jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to modification
or appeal except to the extent pennitted by Sections 10 and
II of the Federal Arbitration Act (9 V.S.C. 10,11).
{The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally.j
28
K:\42000UOMIIf.SPECS'Fronl\I910,8,dot
I
I
I
ARTICLE 17-MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any provIsIon of the Contract
Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to
the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of
the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or
sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the
last business address known to the giver of the notice.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Computation Or Time:
17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period.
If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or
Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of
the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted
from the computation.
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours
measured from midnight to the next midnight shall
constitute a day.
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury
or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or act of the other party or of any of the other
party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the
other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing
to the other party within a reasonable time of the first
observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this
paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or
a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of
limitations or repose.
I
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these
General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but
without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and
obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs
6.30,13.1,13.12, 13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights
and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER
thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed
in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies
available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed
or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or
guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as
effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract
Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All
representations, warranties and guarantees made in the
Contract Documents will survive final payment and
.
-
Ii
-
.29
termination or completion of the Agreement.
Equal Employment Opportunity:
17.5 During the performance of this contract, the
Contractor agrees as follows:
17.5.1 The Contractor shall not discriminate
against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or
handicap.
17.5.2 The Contractor shall take affirmative
action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that
employees are treated during employment without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin,
or handicap. Such action shall include, but not be
limited to:
17.5.2.1 employment;
17.5.2.2 upgrading;
17.5.2.3 demotion;
17.5.2.4 transfer;
17.5.2.5 recruitment or recruitment
advertising;
17.5.2.6 layoff or termination;
17.5.2.7 rates of payor other forms of
compensation; and
17.5.2.8 selection for training, including
apprenticeship.
17.6 The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places
available to employees and applicants for employment the
notices to be provided by Augusta-Richmond County Parks
and Recreation Department that explain this clause.
17.7 The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the
Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment' without regard to race, color,
religion, sex, national origin, or handicap.
17.8 The Contractor shall send, to each labor union or
representative of workers with which it has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding,
the notice to be provided by Augusta-Richmond County
Parks and Recreation Department advising the labor union
or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments
under this clause, and post copies of the notice in
conspicuous places available to employees and applicants
for employment.
17.9 The Contractor shall comply with Executive
K:\42OOO21A01011N\SPECS\FronlIlil0,8.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
Order 11246, as amended, and the rules, regulations, and
orders of the Secretary of Labor.
17.10 The Contractor shall furnish all infonnation and
reports required by Executive Order 11246, as amended,
Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended,
and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of
Labor, or pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall pennit
access to its books, records, and accounts by the Secretary
of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain
compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
17.11 In the event of a detennination that the
Contractor is not in compliance with this clause or any rule,
regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, this contract
may be canceled, tenninated, or suspended in whole or in
part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for
further Government contracts, or Federally assisted
construction contracts under the procedures authorized in
Executive Order 11246, as amended. In addition, sanctions
may be imposed and remedies invoked against the
Contractor as provided in Executive Order 11246, as
amended, the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary
of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
17.12 The Contractor shall include the tenns and
conditions of this clause in every subcontract or purchase
order unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders
of the Secretary of Labor issued under Executive Order
11246, as amended, so that these terms and conditions will
be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The
Contractor shall take such action with respect to any
subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing
and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may
direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including
sanctions for noncompliance; provided that if the
Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with,
litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such
direction, the Contractor may request the United States to
enter into the litigation to protect the interests of the United
States.
Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for
Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of the Housing and
Urban Development Act of 1968:
1 7.13 The work to be perfonned under this contract is
subject to the requirements of section 3 of the Housing and
Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C.
1701 u (section 3). The purpose of section 3 is to ensure that
employment and other economic opportunities generated by
HUD assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by
section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed
to low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons
who are recipients of HUD assistance for housing.
'- t .:~ .
T~.!'.. -..
. ;, .
17.14 The parties to this contract agree to comply with
HUD regulations in 24 CFR part 135, which implement
section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract,
the parties to this contract certify that they are under no
contractual or other impediment that would prevent them
from complying with the part 135 regulations.
1 7. 15 The contractor agrees to send to each labor
organization or representative of workers with which the
contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other
understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor
organization or workers representative of the contractors
commitments under this section 3 clause, and will post
copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site
where both employees and applicants for training and
employment positions can see the notice. The notice shall
describe the section 3 preference, shall set forth minimum
number and job titles subject to hire, availability of
apprenticeship and training positions, the qualifications for
each; and the name and location of the person(s) taking
applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated
date the work shall begin.
17.16 The contractor agrees to include this Section 3
clause in every subcontract subject to compliance with
regulations in 24 CFR part 135, and agrees to take
appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision
of the subcontract or in this Section 3 clause, upon a
finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the
regulations in 24 CFR part 135. The contractor will not
subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor
has knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in
violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135.
17.17 The contractor will certify that any vacant
employment positions, including training positions, that are
filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the
contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those
to whom the regulations of 24 CFR part 135 require
employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to
circumvent the contractors obligations under 24 CFR part
135.
17.18 Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24
CFR part 135 may result in sanctions, termination of this
contract for default, and debarment or suspension from
future HUD assisted contracts.
17.19 In the event of a detennination by Augusta-
Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department that
the Contractor is not in compliance with this clause or any
rule, regulation, or report submission requirements of
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation.
30
K:\420002IAOMl~ronftI91o.8.doc
I
I
Department, this contract may be canceled, tenninated, or
suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be
declared ineligible for further Augusta-Richmond County
Parks and Recreation Department contracts.
I
I
I
I
Interest of Members of Congress:
17.20 No member of or delegate to the Congress of the
United States of America shall be admitted to any share or
part of this contract or to any benefit that may arise
therefrom.
I
Interest of Members, OffICers, or Employees and Former
Members, OffICers, or Employee:
17.21 No member, officer, or employee of Augusta-
Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department, the
Owner, no member of the governing body of Augusta-
Richmond County, and no other public official of Augusta-
Richmond County who exercises any functions or
responsibilities with respect to the project, shall, during his
or her tenure, or for one year thereafter, have any interest,
direct or indirect, in this contract or the proceeds thereof.
I
I
Limitations on Payments made to Influence Certain
Federal Financial Transactions:
17.22 The Contractor agrees to comply with Section
1352 of title 31, United States Code which prohibits the use
of Federal appropriated funds to pay any person for
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or
employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, and
officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a
Member of Congress in connection with any of the
following covered Federal actions: the awarding of any
Federal contract; the making of any Federal grant; the
making of any Federal loan; the entering into of any
cooperative agreement; or the modification of any Federal
contract. grant. loan. or cooperative agreement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.23 The Contractor further agrees to comply with
the requirement of the Act to furnish a disclosure (OMB
Standard Fonn LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities) if
any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including
profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction)
have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or
employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer
or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress in connection with a Federal contract, grant, loan,
or cooperative agreement.
I
I
17.24 Indian tribes (except those chartered by States)
and Indian organizations as defined in section 4 of the
Indian Self-Detennination and Education Assistance Act
(25 U.S.C. 450B) are exempt from the requirements of this
clause.
Royalties and Patents:
17.25 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and
license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for
infringement of any patent rights and shall save Augusta-
Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department and
the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof; except
that Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation
Department, the Architect, and the Owner shall be
responsible for all such loss when a particular design,
process or the product of a particular manufacturer or
manufacturers is specified and the Contractor has no reason
to believe that the specified design, process, or product is
an infringement. If, however, the Contractor has reason to
believe that any design, process or product specified is an
infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall promptly
notify Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation
Department. Failure to give such notice shall make the
Contractor responsible for resultant loss.
Examination and Retention of Contractor's Records:
17.26 Augusta-Richmond County Parks and
Recreation Department, HUD, or the Comptroller General
of the United States, or any of their duly authorized
representatives shall, until 3 years after fmal payment under
this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of
the Contractor's directly pertinent books, documents,
papers, or other records involving transactions related to
this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination,
excerpts, and transcriptions.
17.27 The Contractor agrees to include in first-tier
subcontracts under this contract a clause substantially the
same as paragraph (a) above. "Subcontract," as used in this
clause, excludes purchase orders not exceeding $10,000.
17.28 The periods of access and examination in
paragraphs A and B above for records relating to (I)
appeals under the "Disputes" clause of this contract, (2)
litigation or settlement of claims arising from the
perfonnance of this contract, or (3) costs and expenses of
this contract to which Augusta-Richmond County Parks and
Recreation Department, HUD, or Comptroller General or
any of their duly authorized representatives has taken
exception shall continue until disposition of such appeals,
litigation, claims, or exceptions.
Labor Standards - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts:
17.29 If the total amount of this contract exceeds
$2,000, the Federal labor standards set forth in the clause
below shall apply to the construction work to be perfonned
under the contract, except if the construction work has been
detennined to be "Non-routine Maintenance" subject to the
tenns of that clause of this contract.
31
K:1420002WlMINlSPECS'fronI\l 81 Q,8,doc. .
I
I
I
Minimum Wages:
17.30 All laborers and mechanics employed or
working upon the site of the work (or, under the United
States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of
1949, in the construction or development of the project)
will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a
week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any
account (except such payroll deductions as are pennitted by
regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the
Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages
and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof)
due at time of payment computed at rates not less than
those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary
of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof,
regardless of any contractual relationship which may be
alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers
and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably
anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section
I (b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or
mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or
mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR
5.5(a)(I)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs
incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often
than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which
cover the regular weekly period, are deemed to be
constructively made or incurred during such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid not less than the
appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage
determination for the classification of work actually
perfonned, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29
CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics perfonning
work in more than one classification may be compensated
at the rate specified for each classification for the time
actually worked therein; provided, that the employer's
payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each
classification in which work is performed. The wage
determination (including any additional classification and
wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(I)(ii) and the
Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times
by the Contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the
work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be
easily seen by the workers.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.31 Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not
listed in the wage detennination and which is to be
employed under the contract shall be classified in
confonnance with the wage detennination. HUD shall
approve an additional classification and wage rate and
fringe benefits therefore only when all the following criteria
have been met:
I
I
17.31.1 The work to be perfonned by the
classification requested is not perfonned by a
.
-
classification in the wage determination;
17.31.2 The classification is utilized in the area by
the construction industry; and
17.31.3 The proposed wage rate, including any
bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable
relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage
determination.
17.32 If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics
to be employed in the classification (if known), or their
representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the
classification and wage rate (including the amount
designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report
of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to
the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division,
Employee Standards Administration, U.S. Department of
Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an
authorized representative, will approve, modify, or
disapprove every additional classification action within 30
days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will
notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that
additional time is necessary.
17.33 In the event the Contractor, the laborers or
mechanics to be employed in the classification or their
representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on
the proposed classification and wage rate (including the
amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate),
HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the
views of all interested parties and the recommendation of
HUD or its designee, to the Administrator of the Wage and
Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an
authorized representative, will issue a determination within
30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or
will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period
that additional time is necessary.
17.34 The wage, rate (including fringe benefits where
appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs
(b)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this clause shall be paid to all workers
perfonning work in the classification under this contract
from the first day on which work is performed in the
classification.
17.35 Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in
the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a
fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the
Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage
detennination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit
or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
17.36 If the Contractor does not make payments to a
32
1l1420002WlMIN\SPECS\FronlI191 Q,8.doc
I
I
trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider
as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount
of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide
fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided. that the
Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of
the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-
Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may
require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account
assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or
program.
I
I
I
I
17.37 Withholding of funds. HUD or its designee
shall, upon its own action or upon written request of an
authorized representative of the Department of Labor,
withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under
this contract or any other Federal contract with the same
prime Contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract
subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements,
which is held by the same prime Contractor, so much of the
accrued payments or advances as may be considered
necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including
apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the
Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages
required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any
laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or
helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or,
under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the
Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of
the project), all or part of the wages required by the
contract, HUn or its designee may, after written notice to
the Contractor, take such action as necessary to cause the
suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee
of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD or its
designee may, after written notice to the Contractor,
disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the
Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to
whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make
such disbursements in the case of direct Davis-Bacon Act
contracts.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Payrolls and basic records:
17.38 Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall
be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the
work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for
all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work
(or, under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under
the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or
development of the project). Such records shall contain the
name, address, and social security number of each such
worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of
wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs
anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents
thereof of the types described in section I (b)(2)(B) of the
Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours
I
I
I
I
I
-
worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid.
Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found. under 29 CFR
5.5(a)(l)(iv), that the wages of any laborer or mechanic
include the amount of costs reasonably anticipated in
providing benefits under a plan or program described in
section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor
shall maintain records which show that the commitment to
provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or
program is financially responsible, and that the plan or
program has been communicated in writing to the laborers
or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs
anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such
benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees
under approved programs shall maintain written evidence
of the registration of apprenticeship programs and
certification of trainee programs, the registration of the
apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates
prescribed in the applicable programs.
17.39 The Contractor shall submit weekly for each
week in which any contract work is perfonned a copy of all
payrolls to Augusta-Richmond County Parks and
Recreation Department for transmission to HUD or its
designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately
and completely all of the infonnation required to be
maintained under subparagraph C (1) of this clause. This
infonnation may be submitted in any fonn desired.
Optional Form WH-347 (Federal Stock Number 029-005-
00014-1) is available for this purpose and may be
purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The
prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of
copies of payrolls by all subcontractors.
17.40 Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by
a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the Contractor or
subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the
payment of the persons employed under the contract and
shall certify the following:
17.40.1 That the payroll for the payroll period
contains the information required to be maintained
under paragraph C of this clause and that such
infonnation is correct and complete;
17.40.2 That each laborer or mechanic (including
each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the
contract during the payroll period has been paid the full
weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or
indirectly, and that no deductions have been made
either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned,
other than pennissible deductions as set forth in 29
CFR Part 3; and
33
K:I420002IAOt.lI1fSPECS'f1'Ol161Q10,8,doc .
I
I
17.40.3 That each laborer or mechanic has been
paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe
benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of
work perfonned, as specified in the applicable wage
detennination incorporated into the contract.
I
I
I
I
17.41 The weekly submission of a properly executed
certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Fonn
WH-347 shall satisfy the requirements for submission of
the "Statement of Compliance" required by subparagraph
C of this clause.
17.42 The falsification of any of the above
certifications may subject the Contractor or subcontractor
to civil or criminal prosecution under Section IDOl of Title
18 and Section 3729 of Title 31 of the United States Code.
I
17.43 The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the
records required under subparagraph D available for
inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized
representatives ofHUD or its designee, Augusta-Richmond
County Parks and Recreation Department, or the
Department of Labor and shall penn it such representatives
to interview employees during working hours on the job. If
the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required
records or to make them available, HUD or its designee
may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action
as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further
payment. advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthennore,
failure to submit the required records upon request or to
make such records available may be grounds for debarment
action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.44 Apprentices. Apprentices will be pennitted to
work at less than the predetennined rate for the work they
perfonned when they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship
program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor,
Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State
Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a
person is employed in his or her first 90 days of
probationary employment as an apprentice in such an
apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered
in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship
Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary
employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of
apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft
classification shall not be greater than the ratio pennitted to
the Contractor as to the entire work force under the
registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an
apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise
employed as stated in this paragraph, shall be paid not less
I
.
-
-
than the applicable wage rate on the wage detennination for
the classification of work actually perfonned. In addition,
any apprentice perfonning work on the job site in excess of
the ratio pennitted under the registered program shall be
paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage
detennination for the work actually perfonned. Where a
contractor is perfonning construction on a project in a
locality other than that in which its program is registered,
the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the
journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or
subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every
apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in
the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman
hourly rate specified in the applicable wage detennination.
Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with
the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the
apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits,
apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits
listed on the wage detennination for the applicable
classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour
Division detennines that a different practice prevails for the
applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in
accordance with that detennination. In the event the Bureau
of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship
Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of
an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be
pennitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable
predetennined rate for the work perfonned until an
acceptable program is approved.
17.45 Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16,
trainees will not be pennitted to work at less than the
predetennined rate for the work perfonned unless they are
employed pursuant to and individually registered in a
program which has received prior approval, evidenced by
fonnal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor,
Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of
trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater
than pennitted under the plan approved by the Employment
and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at
not less than the rate specified in the approved program for
the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of
the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage
detennination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in
accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If
the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits,
trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits
listed in the wage detennination unless the Administrator of
the Wage and Hour Division detennines that there is an
apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding
journeyman wage rate in the wage detennination which
provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices.
Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is
34
K:\42000mMlN\SPECS'frort.1i10,8.doc .
I
I
not registered and participating in a training plan approved
by the Employment and Training Administration shall be
paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage
detennination for the classification of work actually
performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the
job site in excess of the ratio pennitted under the registered
program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate
in the wage detennination for the work actually perfonned.
In the event the Employment and Training Administration
withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor
will no longer be pennitted to utilize trainees at less than
the applicable predetennined rate for the work perfonned
until an acceptable program is approved.
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.46 Equal employment opportunity. The utilization
of apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this clause
shall be in confonnity with the equal employment
opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as
amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
I
17.47 Compliance with Copeland Act requirements.
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29
CFR Part 3, which are hereby incorporated by reference in
this contract.
I
I
I
17.48 Contract tennination; debarment. A breach of
this contract clause may be grounds for tennination of the
contract and for debarment as a Contractor and a
subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
17.49 Compliance with Davis-Bacon and related Act
requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-
Bacon and related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1,3, and
5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.
I
17.50 Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes
arising out of the labor standards provisions of this clause
shall not be subject to the general dispute clause of this
contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with
the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29
CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this
clause include disputes between the Contractor (and any of
its subcontractors) and Augusta-Richmond County Parks
and Recreation Department, HUD, the U.S. Department of
Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
I
I
I
I
CertifICation of eligibility:
17.51 By entering into this contract, the Contractor
certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or
finn who has an interest in the Contractor's finn is a person
or finn ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United
States Government by virtue of section 3( a) of the Davis-
Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
I
-
-
17.52 No part of this contract shall be subcontracted
to any person or finn ineligible to be awarded contracts by
the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of
the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(I).
17.53 The penalty for making false statements is
prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used
in this paragraph, the terms "laborers" and "mechanics"
include watchmen and guards:
17.54 Overtime requirements. No contractor or
subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work
which may require or involve the employment of laborers
or mechanics, including watchmen and guards, shall require
or pennit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in
which the individual is employed on such work to work in
excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or
mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one
and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours
worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek.
17.55 Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated
damages. In the event of any violation of the provisions set
forth in subparagraph J (1) of this clause, the Contractor
and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable
for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and
subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the
case of work done under contract for the District of
Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such
territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages
shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or
mechanic (including watchmen and guards) employed in
violation of the provisions set forth in subparagraph J (1) of
this clause, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on
which such individual was required or permitted to work in
excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without
payment of the overtime wages required by provisions set
forth in subparagraph J (1) of this clause.
17.56 Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated
damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or
upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld,
from any moneys payable on account of work perfonned by
the Contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or
any Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any
other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the
same prime Contractor such sums as may be detennined to
be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or
subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as
provided in the provisions set forth in subparagraph J (2) of
this clause.
35
K:\42OOO21A01olItflSPECS'frontlI810,8.iloe
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Subcontracts:
17.57 The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in
any subcontracts all the provisions contained in this clause,
and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by
appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring
the subcontractors to include these provisions in any lower
tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible
for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier
subcontractor with all these provisions.
Labor Standards Non-routine Maintenance:
17.58 Not applicable.
Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates:
17.59 Any prevailing wage rate (including basic
hourly rate and any fringe benefits), determined under State
law to be prevailing, with respect to any employee in any
trade or position employed under the contract, is
inapplicable to the contract and shall not be enforced
against the Contractor or any subcontractor, with respect to
employees engaged under the contract whenever either of
the following occurs:
17.59.1 Such non-Federal prevailing wage rate
exceeds:
17.59.1.1 the applicable wage rate determined
by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to the Davis-
Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.) to be
prevailing in the locality with respect to such
trade;
17.59.1.2 an applicable apprentice wage rate
based thereon specified in an apprenticeship
program registered with the Department of Labor
or a DOL-recognized State Apprenticeship
Agency;
17.59.1.3 an applicable trainee wage rate
based thereon specified in a DOL-certified trainee
program.
17.60 Such non-Federal prevailing wage rate,
exclusive of any fringe benefits, exceeds the applicable
wage rate determined by the Secretary of HUD to be
prevailing in the locality with respect to such trade or
position.
36
K:142Ol102IADMlNlSPECS'fronfl 191 D.B.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
SC-l. These supplementary conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of
the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated
below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and
effect.
SC-2. The terms used in the supplementary condition which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions to the Construction Contract have the meanings assigned to them in the General
Conditions.
SC-3. Amend first sentence of paragraph 2.2.
Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to five (5) copies. . .
SC-4. Revise paragraph 2.7 in its entirety and insert the following.
Before any work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with
a copy to ENGINEER, certificates (and other evidence of insurance requested by
OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance
with paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4.
SC-5. Amend paragraph 4.1.
Add: Contractor shall schedule work as prioritized in the Pre-construction meeting.
SC-6. Amend paragraph 4.2.1
Add: Soil boring report is not available.
SC-7. The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.3 of the General Conditions
shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by
Laws and Regulations:
a. Policies, Certificates, Limits and Disposition of Documents. - The Contractor shall
obtain at his expense insurance with limits as shown hereinbelow unless the
Contractor desires to broaden the limits and obtain more protection.
.
[1] OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in name
of the owner as insured. (See Invitation to Bid for exact legal name of
owner.)
Bodily injury, including death -limits of$l,OOO,OOO.OO for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage - limits of $500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
.
.1
. "" , , FILE\K;\oI20002IAOMINISPECS'FRONT\SUPPLEMENT ARYCOHDITlQHS,DQC. ,..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
for the aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with owner prior to
commencement of work.
[2] CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in
the name of the Contractor.
Bodily injury, including death -limits of $1 ,000,000.00 for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage -limits of $500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
for the aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to owner prior to
commencement of work.
[3] CONTRACTOR'S PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in the
name of the Contractor.
Borlily injury, including death -limits of $1 ,000,000.00 for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage - limits of $500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
for the aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to Owner prior to
commencement of work.
[4] BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE - Payable to the Contractor and Owner, as
their interests may appear, upon the entire structure and upon all materials
in or adjacent thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to
100% of the insurable value thereof covering fire, extended coverage,
vandalism and malicious mischief.
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with Owner prior to
commencement of work.
b.
Acceptability of Insurers to Owner. - No insurance will be acceptable unless written
by a company licensed by the State Insurance Commissioner to do business in
Georgia at the time the policy is issued, and the company must in addition be
acceptable to the Owner. To avoid inconvenience, any general contractor or
subcontractor must get in touch with the Owner to determine whether the insurance
company or companies he expects to use is or are acceptable to the Owner. All
policies and certificates must be signed or countersigned, as the case may be, by
resident Georgia agents.
c.
Termination of Obligation to Insure. - Unless otherwise expressly provided to the
contrary, the obligation to insure as prescribed herein shall not terminate until the
Engineer shall have executed the final certificate.
d.
Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the full course of construction "All
Risk" Builder's Risk Insurance coverage which names the Contractor, Owner and
Engineer as co-insured.
e.
The Contractor will turn over areas completed for construction prior to substantial
2
. - , FIi..E'J<:\42llOO2'.\OMINlSPECS'FRONT\SlJPPl.EMEAAYCONDITIONS,DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
completion. Contractor shall maintain insurance on work he performs within "battery
limits" .
SC-8. Add to paragraph 6.8.2.
The CONTRACTOR shall identify Utility Contractor at time of bid and mark the Bid
with the Utility Contractor's Georgia License Number. Within two (2) days of being
notified that the CONTRACTOR is the apparent low bidder, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a list to the ENGINEER of the following SUBCONTRACTORS that
he plans to use on this project. The list shall include:
a. Masonry subcontractor
b. Building subcontractor
c. Electrical subcontractor
d. Mechanical subcontractor
SC-9. Add paragraph 7.5
7.5. Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any
separate contractor at the site, or should any claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work at the site be made by any
separate contractor against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, the
Construction Coordinator or any other person, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or to
otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall,
to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold
OWNER, ENGINEER and the Construction Coordinator harmless from and
against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but not limited
to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court
and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any
action, legal or equitable, brought by any separate contractor against
OWNER, ENGINEER, or the Construction Coordinator to the extent based
on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
Should a separate contractor cause damage to the Work or property of
CONTRACTOR or should the performance of Work by any separate
contractor at the site give rise to any other claim, CONTRACTOR shall not
institute any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER, ENGINEER or the
Construction Coordinator or permit any action against any of them to be
maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit in any court or before
any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from
OWNER, ENGINEER or the Construction Coordinator on account of any
such damage or claim. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in
performing or furnishing Work by any act or neglect of a separate contractor
and OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to t he extent of any
.
3 ,
FILE\K:142OOD2\o\DMINlSPECS'I'RONT\SUPPLEMENT ARYCONDITIO~,DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
adjustment in Contract Time attributable thereto, CONTRACTOR may make
a claim for an extension of time in accordance with Article 12. An extension
of the Contract Time shall be CONTRACTOR's exclusive remedy with
respect to OWNER, ENGINEER and Construction Coordinator for any delay,
disruption, interference or hindrance caused by any separate contractor. This
paragraph does not prevent recovery from OWNER, ENGINEER or
Construction Coordinator for activities that are their respective
responsibilities.
SC-I0. Delete paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in
its place:
9.10 ENGINEER will have authority to determine the actual quantities and
classifications of items of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR,
and the written decisions of ENGINEER on such matters will be final,
binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR and not subject to appeal (except
as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual conditions).
SC-ll. Delete ARTICLE 16.
.
4
Ftl.E\K:\42fJOO2WlMINlSPECS"FRONnSUPPL.EMENT ARYCONOITIONS,DOC
I
I
I
ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
MANDATORY COMPLIANCE FOR SECTION 3
I
I
I
I
1. Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of the
Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968: The work to be performed under this contract is
subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 (12 U.S.C.
1701 u) (Section 3). The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic
opportunities generated by HUD-assisted projects covered by Section 3, shall, to the greatest extent
feasible, be directed to low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of
HUD assistance for housing.
I
I
2. Employment opportunities generated by Section 3 covered assistance means all employment
opportunities generated by the expenditure of Section 3 covered public and Indian housing assistance
(i.e., operating assistance, development assistance and modernization assistance, as described in Section
135.3(a)(l)). With respect to Section 3 covered housing and community development assistance, this
term means all employment opportunities arising in connection with Section 3 covered projects (as
described in Section 135.3(a)(2)), including management and administrative jobs connected with the
Section 3 covered project. Management and administrative jobs include architectural, engineering or
related professional services required to prepare plans, drawings, specifications, or work write-ups; and
jobs directly related to administrative support of these activities, e.g., construction manager, relocation
specialist, payroll clerk, etc.
I
3. Definitions:
I
I
I
a.
Section 3 resident means:
1) A public housing resident; or
2) An individual who resides in the metropolitan area or non-metropolitan county in which
the Section 3 covered assistance is expended, and who is:
I
a) A low-income person, as this term is defined in Section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act (42
U.S.c. ]437a(b)(2)). Section 3(b)(2) of the ]937 Act defines this term to mean
families (including single persons) whose incomes do not exceed 80% of the median
income for the area, as detennined by the Secretary, with adjustments for smaller and
larger families, except that the Secretary may establish income ceilings higher or
lower than 80% of the median for the area on the basis of the Secretary's findings that
such variations are necessary because of prevailing levels of construction costs or
unusually high or low-income families; or
I
I
I
b) A very low-income person, as this term is defined in Section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act
(42 U.S.c. 1437a(b)(2)). Section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act (42 V.S.C. 1437a(b)(2))
defines this term to mean families (including single persons) whose incomes do not
exceed 50% of the median family income for the area, as detennined by the Secretary
with adjustments for smaller and larger families, except that the Secretary may
establish income ceilings higher or lower than 50% of the median for the area on the
basis of the Secretary's findings that such variations are necessary because of
unusually high or low family incomes.
iiii
-1-
K:1420002\ADMIMSPECS\FronMddSupplmCondilion,doc
., ~'. ..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c)
A person seeking the training and employment preference provided by Section 3
bears the responsibility of providing evidence, if requested, that he/she is eligible for
the preference. Section 8 assistance means assistance provided under Section 8 of the
1937 Act (42 D.S.C. 1437f) pursuant to 24 CFR part 882, subpart G.
a.
Section 3 business concern means a business concern, as defined in this Section:
1)
That is 51 percent or more owned by Section 3 residents; or
2)
Whose permanent, full-time employees include persons, at least 30 percent of whom are
currently Section 3 residents, or within three years of the date offrrst employment with the
business concern were Section 3 residents; or
3)
That provides evidence ofa commitment to subcontract in excess of25 percent of the dollar
award of all subcontracts to be awarded to business concerns that meet the qualifications
set forth in paragraphs (1) or (2) in this definition of "Section 3 business concern."
b.
Subcontractor means any entity (other than a person who is an employee of the contractor) which
has a contract with a contractor to undertake a portion of the contractor's obligation for the
performance of work generated by the expenditure of Section 3 covered assistance, or arising in
connection with a Section 3 covered project.
c. Section 3 clause means the contract provisions set forth in Sec. 135.38.
d.
Section 3 covered activity means any activity that is funded by Section 3 covered assistance public
and Indian housing assistance.
4.
Responsibilities of the Augusta-Richmond County Housing & Neighborhood Development (HND)
and Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation.
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department has the responsibility to comply with
Section 3 in its own operations, and ensure compliance in the operations of its contractors and
subcontractors. This responsibility includes but may not be necessarily limited to:
a. Implementing procedures designed to notify Section 3 residents about training and employment
opportunities generated by Section 3 covered assistance and Section 3 business concerns about
contracting opportunities generated by Section 3 covered assistance;
b.
Notifying potential contractors for Section 3 covered projects of the requirements of this part, and
incorporating the Section 3 clause in all solicitations and contracts;
c.
Facilitating the training and employment of Section 3 residents and the award of contracts to
Section 3 business concerns by undertaking activities to reach the goals set forth in Section
135.30;
d.
Assisting in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the requirements of
this part, and refraining from entering into any contract with any contractor where the recipient
has notice or knowledge that the contractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24
CFR part 135; and
e. Documenting actions taken to comply with the requirements of this part, the results of actions
-2-
K:\420002\AOMINlSPECS'frontlAddSupplmCondition.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
taken and impediments, if any.
5.
Emp]oyment and Contracting with Residents, Resident-owned Businesses, Small and Other
Businesses.
a.
General. HND strongly supports a policy of contracting and providing employment opportunities
with residents and resident-owned businesses. Accordingly, agencies are strongly encouraged to
contract with residents and resident-owned businesses whenever possible.
b.
Section 3 of the HUD Act of ]968.
])
This law requires that HND make an effort to ensure that individuals or firms located in or
owned in substantial part by persons residing in the area of a project are used when
possible. The regulations describing this program are in 24 CFR Part 135 and the contract
form includes a clause implementing this requirement.
2)
Employment and training opportunities for pre-apprentices, apprentices and other training
programs for residents will assist Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation
Department in meeting resident employment, training, and local contracting objectives
under Section 3. Further guidance is provided in Federa] Register Notice, dated October 6,
1992 and HUD Notice 92-0 I-SL (See Appendix 32).
3)
HUD Handbook 8023.], Implementing Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development
Act of 1966 provides guidance regarding compliance with Section 3. Some of the
important provisions include but are not limited to the following:
a)
Solicitations, regardless of the method, must advise prospective contractors of the
Section 3 requirements.
The Section 3 contract clause must be included in all covered contracts.
b)
c)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department and its contractors
must make a good faith effort to provide, to the greatest extent feasible, training and
employment to lower income residents of the unit of local government in connection
with the work on an assisted project. In filling vacancies, Augusta-Richmond County
Parks and Recreation Department and its contractors may prominently post notices
at the project site and in the Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation
Department Office and may contact resident councils and resident management
corporations, in addition to their other recruitment efforts, to meet the requirements
of Section 3.
d)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department and its contractors
must make a good faith effort to award contracts, to the greatest extent feasible, to
businesses located in or owned in substantial part by persons residing in Augusta-
Richmond County. In meeting this requirement Augusta-Richmond County Parks
and Recreation Department should consider use of the alternative procurement
procedures at 24 CFR Part 963. See paragraph 6 below.
e)
Contractors must make a good faith effort to award subcontracts to businesses located
in Augusta-Richmond County or substantially owned by persons residing in Augusta-
Richmond County.
-3-
K:\420002\ADMINlSPECS\FronllAddSuppImCondition,doc
I
I
6. Resident-Owned Business.
I
a.
I
I
I
I
HUD issued a fmal rule at 24 CFR Part 963 which allows Augusta-Richmond County Parks
and Recreation Department to use an alternative procurement process when contracting with
businesses owned in substantial part by residents (resident-owned businesses) for public
housing services, supplies, or construction. As stated in paragraph 5, HUD strongly
encourages Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department to contract with
resident businesses to the maximum extent feasible. This has been a proven strategy for
moving low-income persons out of poverty and dependency. The alternative procurement
process is based on the established procurement procedures and requirements set forth in HUD
regulations at 24 CFR 85.36, but limits solicitation to resident-owned businesses. The purpose
of this rule is to enhance the economic opportunities available to residents by facilitating the
award of Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department contracts to
resident-owned businesses that are capable ofperfonning successfully under a proposed
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department contract at a reasonable price.
I
b. The alternative procurement process under 24 CFR 963 is as follows:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7.
Requirements of Bidders. All contractors must comply with Section 3. A bidder claiming a
I
1)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department prepares an independent cost
estimate for the procurement.
2)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department selects the appropriate
method of procurement (small purchase, sealed bidding, competitive proposals, or
noncompetitive proposals).
3)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department solicits a quotation or offer
from one or more resident-owned business.
4)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department receives bids from one or
more resident-owned business and ensures that:
a) the bidders have submitted the required certification regarding previous contracts
received under the alternative procurement process; and
b) the total amount of such previous contracts is less than $500,000.
c)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department performs a cost or
price analysis of the bids received and determines the price that would normally be
paid for comparable supplies, services, or construction in the project area.
5)
Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department awards the contract to the
most advantageous bidder, consistent with the evaluation factors stated in the solicitation,
provided that the price does not exceed the independent cost estimate and the price that
would normally be paid for comparable supplies, services, or construction in the project
area.
6) Augusta-Richmond County Parks and Recreation Department documents the procurement
file and complies with all other applicable procurement requirements of 24 CFR 85.36 or
24 CFR 905.
-4-
K:\420002\ADMINlSPECS'FrontlAddSupplmCondition.doc
I
I
I
Section 3 preference must qualify as a Section 3 Business Concern or a Resident-owned Business. The
bidder must submit the Section 3 Business Concern Certification with the bid to qualify. Additionally,
each contractor must, to the greatest extent feasible, hire a Section 3 eligible resident when a new hire
possibility occurs.
I
I
8. Eligibility for preference. A Section 3 resident seeking the preference in training and employment
provided by this part shall certify, or submit evidence to the recipient contractor or subcontractor, if
requested, that the person is a Section 3 resident, as defined in Section 135.5. (An example of evidence
of eligibility for the preference is evidence of receipt of public assistance, or evidence of participation
in a public assistance program.)
I
9. Eligibility for employment. Nothing in this part shall be construed to require the employment of a
Section 3 resident who does not meet the qualifications of the position to be filled.
I
10. Preference in the award of Section 3 covered contracts. Preference in the award of Section 3 covered
contracts that are awarded under a sealed bid process may be provided as follows:
I
a.
Bids shall be solicited from all businesses (Section 3 business concerns, and non-Section 3
business concerns). An award shall be made to the qualified Section 3 business concern with the
highest priority ranking and with the lowest responsive bid if that bid:
I
1)
Is within the maximum total contract price established in the contracting party's budget for
the specific project for which bids are being taken: and
I
2.
Is not more than "X" higher than the total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any
responsible bidder. "X" is determined as follows:
I
x = Lesser of:
When the lowest responsive bid is less than $100,000. 10% of that bid or $9,000.
._--------~-- --------,--
When the lowest responsive bid is:
-- ----------------, .._~- ---.----.----
At least $100,000, but less than $200,000 9% of that bid, or $16,000
1---------- .....--. -----~-------~-
At/east $200,000, but less than $300,000 8% of that bid, or $21,000
--~-'- ---.--
At least $300,000, but less than $400,000 7% of that bid, or $24,000
-----~-- 1------ -.-..--
At least $400,000, but less that $500,000 6% of that bid, or $25,000
.-._-- - .-.'. - ".--.---------- - --.-- -- ----
At least $500,000, but less than $1 million 5% of that bid, or $40,000
~~-_...- .. ,- .-.---- ----------
At least $1 million, but less than $2 million 4% of that bid, or $60,000
----- .. - ----- _._-----~---~._._--
At least $2 million, but less than $4 million 3% of that bid, or $80,000
------. - .. -- - --~_._--_._-
At least $4 million, but less than $7 million 2% of that bid, or $105,000
-------------. --.-- --- ---
$7 million or more 1 1/2% of the lowest responsive bid with no dollar limit
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Ifno responsive bid by a Section 3 business concern meets the requirements of paragraph A. (1)
of this Section, the contract shall be awarded to a responsible bidder with the lowest responsive
bid.
I
I
I
-5-
K:\420002WJMIMSPECS\FronMddSul'PlmCondilion,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the 27th day of December in the year 2000 by and between
AU2usta-Richmond County Commission
(hereinafter called OWNER) and
hereinafter called CONTRACTOR).
Continental Construction Co, Inc.
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree
as follows:
Article 1. WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:
New Eastview Community Center
The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is
generally described as follows:
Article 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by: Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.c.
1296 Broad Street
Augusta, GA 30901
who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all
duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract
Documents in connection with completion ofthe Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Article 3. CONTRACT TIME.
3.1. The Work will be substantially completed on 9r before 150 ,days after notice to proceed,
and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13 ofthe General
Conditions on or before 180 days after notice to proceed.
-1-
K:\420002\AOM1N\SPECSlFRON1\191 O.8A l,OOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2. Liquidated Damages. O\VNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence
of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed
within the times, specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in
accordance with Article 12 ofthe General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense
and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered
by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such
proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a
penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Hundred dollars ($
100.00 ) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial
Completion until the \\' ork is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion if
CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the
Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay
OWNER One Hundred dollars ($100.00) for each day that expires after
the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment.
Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE.
4.1. OWNER shall pay C01\lfRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Base Bid
$291,800
Add Alternates
Deductive Alternates
$5,273
Total Contract Amount
$297,073
Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General
Conditions.
5.1. Progress Paymenrs. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract
Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as recommended by
ENGINEER, on or about the 15th day of each month during construction as provided
below. All progress payments will be on the basis ofthe progress of the Work measured by the
schedule of values established in paragraph 2.9 of the General Conditions (and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule
of values, as provided in the General Requirements.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount
equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may
-2-
K:I420002IAOMINlSPECS\FROIffi 191 O.SA 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions.
If Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the
character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and
ENGINEER, OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as
long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there
will be no additional retain age on account of Work completed in which case the
remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount
equal to 100% of the Work completed.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion, in an amount sufficient to increase total payments
to CONTRACTOR to 95 % of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER
shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the
General Conditions.
5.2. Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with
paragraph 14.13 ofthe General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as
recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS.
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following
representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any
manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for
obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
reports and studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to
the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the
Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the
General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports,
studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such
purposes.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated
on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to
the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar
-3-
K:I420002IAOMIN\SPECS\FRONT\ 191 O.SA 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by
CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the
Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.3 ofthe General Conditions.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution
thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
Article 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following but not limited to:
7.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 6, inclusive).
7.2. Exhibits to this Agreement
7.3. Performance and Payment Bonds
7.4. Notice of Award.
7.5. General Conditions (pages 1 to 28 inclusive) .
7.6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
7.7. Specifications consisting of Divisions 1,23,4,5,6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15 and 16, as listed in
table of contents thereof.
7.8. Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered CS.l through S-2 inclusive
with each sheet bearing the following general title:
CS.l
A-I
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-4.l
A-5
A-6
Cover Sheet
Foundation Plan
Floor Plan
Schedules and Details
Front and Right Side Elevations
Rear and Left Side Elevations
Wall Sections and Details
Interior Elevations
-4-
K:1420002lADMINlSPECS\FRONT\1910.SA 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C-O Topographic Survey & Demolition Plan
C-l Layout and Utility Plan
C-2 Grading, Drainage and Erosion Control Plan
C-3 Miscellaneous Notes and Details
S-1 Framing Plan
S-2 Structure Details
P-l Waste Piping Plan
P-2 Potable Water Piping Plan
P-3 Plumbing Schedules and Details
M-l HV AC Plan
M-2 HV AC Schedules and Details
E-l Lighting Plan
E-2 Power and Signal P!an
E-3 Electrical Details
7.9. Addenda number, inclusive.
7.10. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages 1 to 7, inclusive).
7.11. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents
amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.4
and 3.5 of the General Conditions.
7.12. The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement
(except as expressly noted otherwise above).
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract
Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5
of the General Conditions.
Article 8. MISCELLANEOUS.
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions
will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract
Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party
sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and
moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the
effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in
-5-
K:\420002lADMINlSPECS\FROIffi 191 O.SA 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from
any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the
Contract Documents.
Article 9. OTHER PROVISIONS.
9.1 GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT
This agreement is intended by the parties to, and does, supercede any and all provisions
ofthe Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.c.G.A. ~ 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any provision of
this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision ofthe Prompt Pay Act, the provisions
of this Agreement shall control.
9.2 CONSENT TO JURISDICTION
All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the OWNER and the
CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to the Agreement, or the breach thereof, shall
be decided in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by
executing this Agreement, specifically consents to venue in Richmond County and
waives any right to contest the venue in the Superior Court of Richmond County,
Georgia.
-6-
K:1420002lAOMINlSPECS\FROIffi 191 O.SA I.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:i,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9.3
RET AINAGE
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due CONTRACTOR on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this
Agreement and CONTRACTOR specifically waives any claim to same.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, O\VNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One
counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. All portions of the
Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or by ENGINEER on
their behalf.
This Agreement will be effective on
01/\0
I
Au
"
"
, _ 2000 .
CONTRACTOR Co~;Ji"'elJ71l1 aJl$'T1ve~
OW J-~
Co.
BY
" ,--
.....,
[CORPORATE SEAL]
Attest
Address for giving notices
License No. .1tJO) # () /)tl. 7D
If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach
evidence of authority to sign.)
-7-
K:I420002\ADMI~PECS\FRONT\ 191 O.SA 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Dated
TO:
(Contractor)
ADDRESS:
PROJECT: New Eastview Community Center
ENGINEER'S PROJECT NO
42.0002
CONTRACT FOR Construction of the New Eastview Community Center and all other
improvements as desil!ned and detailed in the construction drawinl!s and specifications.
You are notified that the Contract Time under the above contract will commence to run on
By that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the
Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the dates of Substantial
Completion and Final Completion are 150 Days and 180 Days after this notice to proceed
respectively.
Before you may start any Work at the site, paragraph 2.7 of the General Conditions provides that you
must each deliver to the owner (with copies to ENGINEER) certificates of insurance which each is
required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
(Owner)
By:
Authorized Signature)
-
Charles J. Johnson, P.E. - Project Engineer
(Title)
1l1420002lAOMINlSPECSIFRONn 191 O.2J.DOC
I
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO.
I
Augusta-Richmond County Board of Commissioners
(OWNER)
To:
I
Contract for: Construction of the New Eastview Community Center
I
ENGINEER's Project No: 42.0002
For Work accomplished through the date of
I
ITEM CONTRACTOR's Schedule of Values Work Completed
Unit Price Quantity Amount Quantity Amount
$ $ $
$
$
Total
(Orig. Contract)
C. O. No. I
C. O. No.2
I
I
I
I
I
Accompanying Documentation:
GROSS AMOUNT DUE.............................. $
LESS % RETAINAGE................................. $
AMOUNT DUE TO DATE.......................... $
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS.................. $
AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION....... $
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S Certification:
I
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (I) all previous progress payments received from OWNER on account
of Work done under the Contract referred to above have been applied to discharge in full all obligations of
CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with Work covered by prior Applications for Payment numbered I through
inclusive; and (2) title to all materials and equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed
in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims,
security interests and encumbrances (except such as covered by Bond acceptable to OWNER).
I
Dated:
I
Contractor
By:
I
Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICA nON is recommended.
I
Dated:
JOHNSON,LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C., Engineer
I
By:
-
-1-
K:\420002lADMINlSPECSlFronn 191 D.SE.doc
I
I
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
I
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
I
This standard form is intended as a guide only. Many projects require a much more extensive form with space for
numerous items, descriptions of Change Orders, identification of variable quantity adjustments, summary of materials
and equipment stored at the site and other information. It is expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer
or Contractor at the time Contractor's Schedule of Values is fmalized. Note also that the format for retain age must be
changed if the Agreement pennits (or the Law provides), and Contractor elects, the deposit of securities in lieu of retain
age. Refer to Article 14 of the General Conditions for provisions concerning payments to Contractor.
I
B. COMPLETING THE FORM
I
The Schedule of Values, submitted and approved as provided in paragraphs 2.6.3 and 2.9 of the General Conditions,
should be copied in the space indicated on the Application For Payment form. Note that the cost of materials and
equipment is often listed separately from the cost of their installation. All Change Orders affecting the Contract Price
should be identified and include such supplemental Schedules of Values as required for progress payments.
I
The form is suitable for use in the Final Application for Payment as well as for Progress Payments; however, the required
accompanying documentation is usually more extensive for fmal payment. All accompanying documentation should be
identified in the space provided on the form.
I
C . ENGINEER'S REVIEW
I
Engineer must review all Applications for Payment with care to avoid recommending any payments not yet earned by
Contractor. All accompanying documentation of legal nature, such as lien waivers, should be reviewed by an attorney,
and Engineer should so advise Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-2-
K:\42000MOMIN\SPECS\Fron~ 191 O.BE.doc
I
I
CHANGE ORDER
No.
I
I
PROJECT: New Eastview Community
OWNER: Augusta-Richmond County Board
of Commissioners
DATE OF ISSUANCE:
I
CONTRACTOR:
ENGINEER: Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.c.
CONTRACT FOR: New Eastview Community
I
ENGINEER's Project No. 42.0002
You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents.
I
Description:
I
Purpose of Change Order:
Attachments: (List documents supporting change)
I
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:
CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME:
Original Contract Price
Original Contract Time
I
$
Previous Change Orders No.
to No.
Net change from previous Change Orders
I
$
I
Contract Price prior to this Change Order
Contract Time Prior to this Change Order
~
I
Net Increase ( decrease) of this Change Order
Order
Net Increase (decrease) of this Change
$
I
Contract Price with all approved Change Orders
Contract Time with all approved Change Orders
I
$
I
RECOMMENDED:
APPROVED:
APPROVED:
I
Engineer
Owner
by
by
by
I
Contractor
.
iiii
-1-
K:\420002lADMIMSPECS\FRONT\ 191 O.BB.DOC
I
I
CHANGE ORDER
INSTRUCTIONS
I
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
I
This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or
Contract Time. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Directive Change must be incorporated into a subsequent
Change Order if they affect Price or Time.
Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Time should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of
accumulating change order items to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes.
For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time. a Field
Order may be used.
I
I
B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM
I
Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and
proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.
I
Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Contractor for approval. After approval
by Contractor, all copies should be sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies
after approval by Owner.
If a change only applies to price or to time, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-2-
K:\420002\ADMINlSPECS\FRONn 191 O.8B.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
ENGINEER's Project No: 42.0002
Project: New Eastview Community Center
CONTRACTOR
Contract Date
Contract For
Construction of Proposed Improvements for Eastview Park
AUl!usta-Richmond County. GA
This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to
the following specified parts thereof:
Construction of the proposed improvements to the existing Eastview Community
Center, Construction ofthe proposed building addition and associated improvements,
parking lot improvements, and other project improvements as shown in the
construction documents.
To: Au!!usta-Richmond County Commission
(OWNER)
And To:
(CONTRACTOR)
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of
OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents
150 Davs After Notice To Proceed
Date of Substantial Completion
-
-1-
K:I420002IAOMINlSPfCSlfROIffi1910.8D.DOC
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all
inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR
to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list
shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR by
The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as follows:
RESPONSIBILITIES:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: None
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Executed by ENGINEER on
JOHNSON, LA SCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
By
ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
CONTRACTOR
By
OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
OWNER
-
-2-
K:\420002'ADMlNlSPECS\FRONT\ 191 O.8D.DOC
I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
BID BOND
DmD~R ~ame and Addms): .
,ont~nentarconstruct~on Company, Inc,
P" O. Box 204198
Augusta, Georgia 30917'
SURETY fNlIne IIId Ackhrm d PrtncID&I Place c:A ~
Safeco Insurance Company of America
Safeco Plaza
Seattle. Washington 98185
OWNER tNane I!nd ~
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
530 Greene St.
Augusta, Georgia 30911
am
BID DUB DAm: December 19. 2000
PROJECT (Brtd ~I RiJdlng Locarkrl):
New Eastview Community Center, Project No. 42.0002, Bid Item #00-160
~
BOND NUMBER: N I A
DATB (Notlalerlbao Bid due darc): December 19. 2000
PBNALSUM:Ten Percent 00%) of Total Amount of Bid
lWllIdIl
,..
IN wmmss WHBkBOF, SuRly IDd Bidder, fnteadiDg to be legally bound hereby. lubJectto die 1eImJ printed OIl
mo I'OYOnI aide her8or, do each cause Ibis Bid Boad to be duty executed OD ita bebalfby ,~ autborized oftIcer. qput.
01' repnIClIdativc.
BIDDER
, Continental
:~st1ilf!!i~nc.~ ~
--".TIII Richard L. Horton,
President
~, . ?m
\ , \ A I- ., 'I' :J .. \.
Attc;t '-k-' u.... .~; \.'~ }...l~:'-:::i-L
--'1IlCI1II Dianne Meese,
SURElY
Safeco Insurance Company
of America (Seal)
By: ('V~"irtg, ~Q
'- ___....TIII '
Della B. C~~e~ Attorney-in-Fact
, \AIIBCfI Power of AJIimey)
Wit n e s s //--"\'" :. '--7/?';' (,/1 _
~ ~ r4-=--'7--U- // / ~"7
Corporate _"-'mdTIII /
Secretary
Note: (1)
(2)
~ sdltBaaas III Co be used far ~ ~Jed nob
NrJ MlgWar refllflnClt 10 Bidder. Quety. OWNER or aIher J8tY Ih8II be COfIIIder8d pUW YIfMn eppIIcabIa.
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. BkSdcr and S~, jointly and sewnDy, bind
Ibaoaolves. 1betr betn., c:xecwm, admioistraton.
IUCCOSSOn IIDd assigns to pay to OWNER upon default of
BidlIer IDY diffinme between the total amount of
Bidder. Bid aod the total amount of the Bid of 1M DOXt
lowest, nIIpOOIible and responsive Bidder u determ1Ded
by OWNER fix' 1be Work required by dHl Comrac:t
DocuIDcIntI. provided chat:
1.1. If Iben Is DO such next lowest, respooslble IDCl
respoasive Bidder, and OWNER does not lbIodon the
Project, tbC21 Bidder end Surety shall pay to OWNER 1bc
panaJ sumlClt forth ClII the fBal ofthls Bond. ad
1.2. In no eVIlI1l shall Bidder's and SuretY.
obliptioa bcmmckr exceed the pcoal sum set fonb on
the tBce of1h1s Bood..
2. Default of Bidder sball occur LIpOD the faiIuro of
. Bidder 10 deJiwr wilhln the tUne requiRd by the Bidding
Documcau (or Ill)' CXlCGSJon thereof aarecd to in wrltiog
by 0WNB1Q the exec:uted Agreement rcqairod by the
Bidd.kIa Doasma1ls and lID)' performance. and paymant
Boods required by me Bidding Documents.
3. 1h1a obJiaadon Ihal1 be Dull and void l.f
3.1. OWNER acoepb Biddets Bid IOd Bidder
cleUvcn within the time requ1rod by the BJddlng
Documllldl (or ~ ft~ dul'Oof agreed to in writing
by OWNER) the exocuted Agreement required by the
B~I Doc:umeob end any pcrfmmance lID&! paymClDt
BaGda required try tho Bidding 00cumeImI. or
3.2. AD Bids are rejected by OWNER, or
3.3. OWNER falb to Issue a Notice of Award to
BJddClr wiIbin the time specUlccl 10 Ibe Bldd11t8
f\ncIlIN'fttt (or 8DY exsaWon dHnor agreed to in wrltiDg.
by Bidder aDd, if appUcabte. CXJDSCIIIted to by ,Sumy
wbeo requlrecl by JlII'Il&t8Pb 5 hcRof).
4.... ~ uDder 1h1s Bond will be due BOd payable
UpoD dofiw1t by Bidder and wilbin 30 I'.SJenltar days after
r=pt by BJdder ad Surety of written notice of dofauh
&om OWNER., whId1 notice will be given wid1
reBIODQlo prompmess. idcmIf)'tna Ihia Bead and d10
Project IDd inthullna . .".......,t orlbe amount duo.
5. Suret)' waives ootice of and any aDd all defenses based
011 or arialDg out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to In writing by OWNBR md Bidder,
pIOVided 1ha11bo total time for lssuIog Notice of Award
iIlcludln& extensions IhaIl Dot la Ibe aggreaate excocd
120 days 8'om Bill due dale without Surety's wrbta1
c:omcnt.
6. No lUll or at:tlon ibal1 be CODUDcncod under IhIs Bood
prior to 30 ~endar days after the notice of default
required In puqraph 4 above is receIved by Bidder 8Dd
DAMAGBS FORM
Surety and in no c:ucl later 1ban CGe year afta' Bid due
dIdc.
7. Any suit or IK:tiaD under this BoIld sball be
comlft~ GIlly in . c:omt of ccmpetalt JlDisdic:doo
IocIted in 1M aaatc in which Ibe Project II IocIIed.
a. Noticca requJnd hc:reuoder sb8lI be in wridDa IDd ..
to Bidder imd Surety 8l1hefr l~ addrossos Mown
OIl Ihe face of d1ia Bood. Suds DOtklClIIDQ be sent by
personal deHvery, commercial courieI' at by UDltecl S1BlrlI
RegisInd or Catified Mail, RCam nceJpI requested,
postage pro.paid, and &baU be deemed to be eft'ecdve
upon receipt by tho party CDDa:I'DCld.
9. Sunlty IbaU causo to be IUICbed to dda DoDd .
c:urreDt IlKS effec:rJve Power or AUDrMy ovfdeado& 1bo
awborily of 1M ofticcr', agG or I'OpI'CIIClIJI8 who
euc:utod drla Bond aa bebaJf of Surety to crxoc:ute, IClIl
and deliver such Bond and biDd tho Surety tbnby.
] O. This Bond is intendocl to ~0I1D to III applicable
starutor)' raquiremonts. AJJy .~ requIrauat of
any IIpplK:8bJe statute tbBl baa boea CIIDlIhd ftUD Ihb
Bood &ball be deemad to be tocIllded bcnil u Jr_ fartb
at Icqth. Iflqy pnMs10a oflhb BoGd -~ wItb 811,)'
applfcable IIIbIIe, thea the providaD or IIIId IIItUIo abalI
IOVerD IDd the remaiDdcI' of IbJa Boad that II DOt III
coaflict tbcrewitb sbaIl c:ontinue In fb1I fotoo IIId effoct.
] 1. 1he term a8icl" u used hcnIn iDdudoI a Bid. offer
or proposal u applicable.
. ...~:
00411-2
1.....~.dl..o.aD.DGc:
{l!i' S A FEe O'
POWER
OF ATTORNEY
SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185
I ~~
NOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation, does each hereby
fpoint
."FRANK W. HAFNER, JR; JANE MCCOY; CAROLYN D. OWENS; ALFRED T. JOHNSON; DELLA B. CASE; ROBERT J. LA VISKY; DUAINE1TE H. CULLUM;
olunabi~South~lina....................*............."....................................................................................................
I true and lawful atto~ey(s>:'in-fact, with ~II authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other doaJments of a similar character
ued in the course of Its bUSiness, and to bInd the respedi\Ie company thereby.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFE CO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and
~ted these presents
I
this 2nd
day of August
, 2000
R.A. PIERSON, SECRETARY
'iJ~~
..kR t:1 R~
W. RANDALL STODDARD, PRESIDENT
CERTIFICATE
Extract from the By-laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
Land of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA:
'cle V, Section 13. - FIDEUTY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Seaetary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that
purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attomeys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to
Eeo.ste on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other doaJments of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business... On any
trument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or
ertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not
be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking."
I
Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970.
"On any certificate exearted by the Secretary or an assistant seaetary of the Company setting out,
I (~The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By-Laws, and
(ii) A copy of the power-of-attomey appointment, exeaJted pursuant thereto, and
(iii) Certifying that said power-ot-attomey appointment is in full force and effect,
the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof."
.. A Pierson, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the
~Oing extracts of the By-laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and
correct, and that both the By-laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect.
I WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation
I
this
\C\ ~\ l."
day of
D (Cf' r\,~ l.l~~
,0b2o
I
I
~t:1R~
I
R.A. PIERSON, SECRETARY
I
S-0974lSAEF 7/98
G') Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation.
8/2/00 PDF
I
I
I
I
PERFORMANCE BOND
I
That
(Legal Tille and Address of the Contractor)
I
as Principal (hereinafter referred to as "Principal"), and
(Legal NalTe and Address of the Surety)
I
as Surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and finnly bound unto
(Owner NaITe and Address)
I
I
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defined, hereinafter in the
amount of:
I
DOLLARS ($
)
(Contract Price)
I
to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their hears, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns jointly and severally, fmnly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounded Principal has entered into a contract with Owner dated
for
I
(NalTe of Work)
in accordance with the drawings and specifications prepared by:
(Isert Full Name and Title)
I
which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
I
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Contractor shall promptly and
faithfully perfonn and comply with the tenns and conditions of said contract; and shall indemnify and save harmless
the Owner against and from all cost, expenses, damages, injury or loss to which said Owner may be subjected by
reason of any wrongdoing, including patent infringement, misconduct, want of care or skill, default or failure of
perfonnance on the part of said Principal, his agents, subcontractors or employees, in the execution or perfonnance
of said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
I
I
(I) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the tenns of the
contract or to the work to be perfonned thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or
changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the tenns
of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings.
I
I
(2) If pursuant to the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be declared in default by the Owner under the
aforesaid Contract, the Surety may promptly perfonn the Contract in accordance with its tenns and
conditions. It shall be the duty of the Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner within
twenty-five (25) days after receipt of a declaration of default of the Surety's election to either remedy the
I
-
PE-l
K:~20002IAOM1N\SPECS\FI!ln\\Per.doc
I
I
I
default or defaults promptly or to perform the contract promptly, time being of the essence. In said notice of
election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall
then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of
(a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction or each item of condemned
work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the contract. The Surety
shall not assert its Principal as justific.ation for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to
promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the Contract.
I
I
I
(3) Supplementary to and in addition to the foregoing, whenever the Owner shall notify the Surety that the
Owner has notice that the Contractor has failed to pay any subcontractor, materialman, or laborer for labor or
materials certified by the Contractor as having been paid for by the Contractor in accordance with said
Contract, which said laborer or materials have been included in a periodical estimate and certified by the
Architect for payment and paid for by the Owner, the Surety shall, within 20 days of receipt of such notice,
cause to be paid any unpaid amounts for such labor and materials.
I
(4) It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, is he desires to do so, is at liberty to
make inquiries at any time of sub-contractors, laborers, materialmen, or other parties concerning the status of
payments for labor, materials, or services furnished in the prosecution of the work.
I
(5) No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the
Owner named herein or the legal successors of the Owner.
I
(6) For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to
whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond may be conducted will be as follows:
I
Name
I
Address
I
City
State
Zip Code
I
Telephone Number
I
Signed and sealed this
In the presence of:
day of
AD,
Witness
Principal
I
(SEAL)
Tille
I
Witness
Surety
I
(SEAL)
Title
I
PE-2
K:\420002IAOMINlSPECS\FronIIPerforrnanBond.doc
I
I
PAYMENT BOND
I
THIS BOND IS EXECUTED TOGETHER WITH ANOTHER BOND IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER AS
OBLIGEE CONDITIONED UPON PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT.
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That
(Legal Title and Address of the Contractor)
I
I
as Principal (hereinafter referred to as "Principal"), and
(Legal Name and Address of the Surety)
I
as Surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto
(Owner Name and Address)
I
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defined, hereinafter in the
amount of:
I
DOLLARS ($
(Contract Price)
I
to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their hears, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns jointly and severally, fmnly by these presents.
I
WHEREAS, the above bounded Principal has entered into a contract with Owner dated
for
(Insert Name of Work)
I
in accordance with the drawings and specifications prepared by:
(insert Full Name and Title)
I
which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
I
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly make
payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and materials supplied in the prosecution of the work
provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect
subject, however, to the following conditions:
I
(I) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or
changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms
of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings.
I
I
(2) A claimant is defined as any subcontractor and any person supplying labor, materials, machinery or
equipment in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract.
.
.
-
(3) Every person entitled to the protection hereunder and who has not been paid in full for labor or materials
furnished in the prosecution of the work referred to in said bond before the expiration of a period of ninety
(90) days after the day on which the last of the labor was done or performed by him, or materials or
PA-I
K\420002lADMIN\SPECS\Fron~Payment80nd.doc
I
I
I
equipment or machinery was furnished or supplied by him for which claim is made, shall have the right to sue
on such payment bond for the amount, or the balance thereof, unpaid at the time of the commencement of
such action and to prosecute such action to [mal execution and judgement for the sum or sums due him,
provided, however, that any person having direct contractual relationship with a subcontract, but no
contractual relationship express or implied with the Contractor furnishing said payment bond upon giving
written notice to said contractor within ninety (90) days from the day on which such person did or performed
the last of the labor, or furnished the last of the materials or machinery or equipment for which such claim is
made stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials
were furnished or supplied from whom the labor was performed or done; provided further that nothing
contained herein shall limit the right of action to said 90-day period. Notice may be served by the depositing
of a notice, registered mail, postage paid, duly addressed to the Contractor at any place he maintains an office
or conducts his business, or his residence, in any post office or branch post office or any letter box under the
control of the Post Office Department or notice may be served in any manner in which the sheriffs of Georgia
are authorized by law to serve summons or process. Every suit instituted under this section shall be brought
in the name of the claimant without Owner being made a party thereof. The official who has custody of said
bond is authorized and directed to furnish, to any person making application thereof who submits an affidavit
that he has supplied labor or materials for such work and payment therefore has not been made, or that he is
being sued on any such bond, a copy of such bond and the contract for which it was given, certified, by the
official who has custody of said bond and contract shall be admitted in evidence without further proof.
Applicants shall pay for such certified statements and such fees as the official fixes to cover the cost of
preparation thereof, but in no case shall the fee which the clerks of the superior courts are pennitted to charge
for similar copies.
I
I
I
I
I
(4)
No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of the final certificate of the Architect.
I
(5) Further, this bond shall be considered the same as a bond furnished under O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1 &
Section 36-82-101, et. seq.
I
(6) For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to
whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond may be conducted will be as follows:
I
Name
I
Address
I
City
State
Zip Code
Telephone Number
I
Signed and sealed this
In the presence of:
day of
AD,
I
Witness
Principal
I
(SEAL)
Title
I
Witness
Surety
(SEAL)
I
Title
.
PA-2
K:\42000ZlADMIN\SPECS\Fron~PayrrentBond.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U. S. Department of Housing And Urban Development
CERTIFICATE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY
I, the undersigned,
the duly authorized and acting legal representative of
, do hereby certify
as follows:
I have examined the attached contract(s) and surety bonds and the manner of
execution thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements have
been duly executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized
representatives; that said representatives have full power and authority to execute said
agreements on behalf of the respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing
agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the parties executing the
same in accordance with terms, conditions and provisions thereof.
Signature
Print Name
Date
I
I
I
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
I
A.
The Project consists of New Eastview Community Center.
I
I.
2.
3.
Project Location: Aiken Street, Augusta, GA
Owner: Richmond County Board of Commissioners, Augusta, GA
Contract Documents, dated November 3, 2000 were prepared for the Project by Johnson,
Laschober and Associates, P.c..
I
B.
The Work consists of Improvements to Eastview Park.
I
I.
The Work includes:
a. Construction of a new community center building.
b. Additional parking and sidewalks
c. New fencing, playground equipment relocation and landscaping
I
c.
The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
I
1.2
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have LIMITED use of the premises for
construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by
the Owner's right to perform work or to CONTINUE OPERATIONS OF THE PARK.
I
B.
Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within
contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indi-
cated.
I
I
I.
2.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available
to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas
for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements
for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
I
I
1.3
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site during the entire construction period. Cooperate
with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate owner usage. Perform
the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.
I
I
END OF SECTION 01010
I
I
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-1
I
I
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applica-
tions for Payment.
I
B.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime contractor's Ap-
plications for Payment.
I
1.
Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construc-
tion Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
I
1.2
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
I
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
I
I.
2.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and
forms, including:
I
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
c. List of subcontractors.
d. Schedule of submittals.
I
Submit the Schedule of Values to the Engineer at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days
before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.
I
B.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
I
I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
2.
a.
b.
Project name and location.
Name of the Engineer.
Project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
I
c.
d.
e.
I
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following
for each item listed:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
I
I
e.
f.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g. Dollar value.
I)
Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100
percent.
3.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of con-
tents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applica-
tions for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not
yet installed.
4.
5.
a.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements
for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
6.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications
for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICA nONS FOR PA YMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
the Engineer and paid for by the Owner.
1.
The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Comple-
tion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of
construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
Payment-Application Forms: Use AlA Document 0702 and Continuation Sheets 0703 as the form for
Applications for Payment.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a per-
son authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Engineer will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day
of the construction period covered by the application.
2.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Engi-
neer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien
and similar attachments, when required.
1.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate informa-
tion related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens
from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous
application.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 2
G.
H.
I.
I
I
I.
Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on
each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waiv-
ers.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics
lien for the period of construction covered by the application.
I
2.
3.
I
4.
a.
Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with perfonnance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
I
5.
Waiver Fonns: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the
Owner.
I
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide
with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
I
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
List of subcontractors.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction meeting.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
I
I
I
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
I
I. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
I
a. Occupancy penn its and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjustlbalance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Final cleaning.
f. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety:
g. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
h. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Engineer's Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
I
I
I
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Completion of Project closeout requirements.
Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay.
Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
Removal of temporary facilities and services.
Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
I
I
I
APPLICATIONS FOR PA YMENT
01027-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 4
I
I
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
A.
1.1 SUMMARY
I
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Preconstruction conferences.
Progress meetings.
Coordination meetings.
I
I
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
B.
c.
1.3
A.
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and
the Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Pro-
ject Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel as-
signments.
I
I
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; the Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall at-
tend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
I
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Tentative construction schedule.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Subm ittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
Safety procedures.
First aid.
Security .
Housekeeping.
Working hours.
I
I
I
I
I
PROGRESS MEETINGS
I
Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Engineer of
scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.
I
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - ]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
B.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Engineer, each subcontractor, supplier, or
other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or perfonnance of fu-
ture activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
c.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items
of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the
Project.
1.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Detennine where
each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or
behind schedule. Detennine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure com-
mitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to in-
sure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Interface requirements.
Time.
Sequences.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication problems.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and services.
Hours of work.
Hazards and risks.
Housekeeping.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
I.
J.
k.
I.
m.
n.
o.
D.
Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party pre-
sent and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress
since the previous meeting and report.
1.
Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concur-
rently with the report of each meeting.
COORDINATION MEETINGS
A.
Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular pro-
gress meetings.
B.
Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for
the construction activities involved.
C.
Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions
or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-2
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 0 I 200
I
I
I
SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
I. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Con-
tract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writ-
ing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or de-
ferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to al-
ternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sec-
tions referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
I
I
AL TERN A TES
01230-1
ALTERNATES
01230 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Acceptance of Alternates and Determination of Low Bid: The Owner may accept any or all al-
ternates in any order as it most favorably affects the Owner and the Project. The Low Bid will
be determined based on Base Bid in the Bid Form and any Alternate that the Owner accepts
prior to signing the "STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STlPULA TED PRICE" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. I SCHEDULE OF AL TERNA TES
A. Alternate No. I: Add timber edged playground with cypress mulch surfacing as designed and
detailed in the contract drawings and specifications.
B. Alternate No.2: Add foundation landscaping and Hybrid Bermuda sod as designed and de-
tailed in the contract drawings and specifications.
C. Alternate No.3: Add for the removal of approximately 90 If of chain link fencing and the in-
stallation of approximately 90 If of new chain link fencing as designed and detailed in the con-
tract drawings and specifications.
END OF SECTION 01230
I
I
I
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITIALS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance
of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Samples.
7. Quality assurance submittals.
B.
Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division I Sections and other Contract Documents for re-
quirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
\.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Permits.
Applications for Payment.
Performance and payment bonds.
Insurance certificates.
List of subcontractors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that re-
quire careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as
intended.
I.
Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination" and may
include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.
B.
Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or fmish ma-
terials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
c.
Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are
not Samples.
I
1.3 SUBMITI AL PROCEDURES
I
I
.
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction ac-
tivities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities
to avoid delay.
I. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and re-
lated activities that require sequential activity.
SUBMlTIALS
01300 - I
iiiii
-
1.4
I
I
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so process-
ing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
I
a. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
I
3.
Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process sub-
mittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals.
a.
Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Engineer must delay proc-
essing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
I
b.
c.
d.
I
B.
Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indi-
cate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
I
I.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Draw-
ings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.
Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
I
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of the Engineer.
Name and address of the Contractor.
Name and address of the subcontractor.
Name and address of the supplier.
Name of the manufacturer.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
I
I
o
O'
h.
I
1.
C.
Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each
submittal from the Contractor to the Engineer using a transmittal form. The Engineer will not accept
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
I
I.
On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate
sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limita-
tions. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document re-
quirements.
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
I
A.
Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction
schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
I
I. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous verti-
cal line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the
Work as indicated in the "Schedule ofYalues."
2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in I 0 percent increments. As
Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible
media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
I
I
SUBMITIALS
01300 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor ele-
ments involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate
graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcon-
tracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion'. Indicate Sub-
stantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Engineer's procedures necessary for cer-
tification of Substantial Completion.
B.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including
submittal review, testing, and installation.
c.
Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major
portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other
activities.
D.
Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and ac-
tual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of
payment requests.
E.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
F.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.5 SUBMITIAL SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete sched-
ule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contrac-
tor's Construction Schedule.
I. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of
products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Engineer's final release or approval.
B.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies
in the Project meeting room and field office.
SUBMlTIALS
01300-3
1.6
I.7
I
I
I.
When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
I
C.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recog-
nized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
I
DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
I
A.
Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the site, and
submit duplicate copies to the Engineer at weekly intervals:
I
1. List of subcontractors at the site.
2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
4. Accidents and unusual events.
5. Meetings and significant decisions.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Emergency procedures.
9. Orders and requests of governing authorities.
10. Change Orders received, implemented.
II. Services connected, disconnected.
12. Equipment or system tests and startups.
13. Partial Completions, occupancies.
14. Substantial Completions authorized.
I
I
I
I
SHOP DRA WINGS
I
A.
Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate
deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard infor-
mation as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the
Project is not a Shop Drawing.
I
B.
Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, tem-
plates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
I
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Dimensions.
Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by II inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches
Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints; submit 5 prints where required for mainte-
nance manuals. The Engineer will retain 2 prints and return the remainder.
I
I
I
7.
8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
1.8 PRODUCT DATA
I
I
SUBMITTALS
01300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
A.
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data in-
cludes printed infonuation, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color
charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
I.
Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes in-
formation on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable infor-
mation. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
Compliance with trade association standards.
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
Notation of coordination requirements.
2.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has
been confinued.
Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for main-
tenance manuals. The Engineer will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken
and corrections or modifications required.
3.
a.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
4.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufactur-
ers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution
on transmittal fonus.
a.
Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's posses-
sion.
Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
b.
SAMPLES
A.
Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated compo-
nents, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
I.
Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Sam-
ples to match the Engineer's sample. Include the following:
a.
b.
Specification Section number and reference.
Generic description of the Sample.
Sample source.
Product name or name of the manufacturer.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability and delivery time.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final
check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics be-
tween the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material
or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the
variations.
SUBMITTALS
01300-5
1.10
I
I
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workman-
ship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar con-
struction characteristics.
c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the
Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate spe-
cial requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property,
are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial
Completion.
I
I
I
3.
Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
I
a. The Engineer will review and return preliminary submittals with the Engineer's notation,
indicating selection and other action.
4.
Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication tech-
niques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Engineer will return
one set marked with the action taken.
Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the
course of construction.
I
5.
I
a.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each
set.
I
b.
I
B.
Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabrica-
tors, suppliers, installers, and others as required for perfonnance of the Work. Show distribution on
transmittal forms.
I
1. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish mate-
rials and to establish the Project standard.
I
a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal
forms to provide a record of activity.
QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the
Specifications.
I
B.
Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or
installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer
certifying compliance with specified requirements.
I
I. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual au-
thorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
I
c.
Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent
testing agencies are specified in Division I Section "Quality ControL"
I
I
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 6
I
I
I
1.11 ENGINEER'S ACTION
I
A.
Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Engineer will
review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
I
1.
Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
I
2. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Engi-
neer will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken.
B.
Unsolicited Submittals: The Engineer will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
I
END OF SECTION 01300
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBMITTALS
01300-7
I
I
SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
A.
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Com-
pletion.
I
I.
Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in storm or sanitary
drains.
Burning or burying of debris, rubbish, or other waste material on the premises is not permitted.
I
2.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MA TERIALS
I
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property
or that might damage finished surfaces.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
FINAL CLEANING
FINAL CLEANING
I
General: Provide final-cleaning operations when indicated. Employ experienced workers or professional
cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to the condition expected from a commer-
cial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
I
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.
I
I.
Clean the Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,
even-textured surface.
Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from the site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,
films, and similar foreign substances. A void disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.
Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,
trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace fin-
ishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence
of repair or restoration.
I
2.
I
3.
4.
5.
I
6.
I
7.
8.
9.
I
01710 - I
I
I
I
a. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
I
I
12.
13.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mor-
tar droppings, and other foreign substances.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,
registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-
out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent. Leave the Project clean and ready for oc-
cupancy.
10.
11.
I
c.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed extenninator to make a final inspection and rid the Project
of rodents, insects, and other pests. Comply with regulations of local authorities.
I
D.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to pro-
tect previously completed installations during the remainder of the construction period.
I
E.
Compliances: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove
waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
I
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the
Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
I
END OF SECTION 01710
I
I
I
I
I
-
FINAL CLEANING
01710-2
I
I
SECTION 0222 I - BUILDING DEMOLITION
I
P ART I - GENERAL
I
I .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
I
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I
1.
2.
Demolition and removal of buildings and structures.
Demolition and removal of site improvements adjacent to a building or structure to be
demolished.
Abandoning in place and removing below-grade construction.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in place and removing site utilities.
I
I
3.
4.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
Division I Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
Division I Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to
Owner or tenant occupancy of adjacent structures.
Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruct ion
photographs taken before building demolition.
Division I Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken
before building demolition.
Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction,
protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition
operations.
Division I Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements.
Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-
grade improvements not part of building demolition.
Division 15 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.
Division 16 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.
I
3.
I
4.
I
5.
6.
I
7.
I
8.
9.
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
I
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or recycled.
I
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or recycled.
I
02221 - I
-
11II
BUILDlNG DEMOLITION
""'"
I
I
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
I
A.
Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered during building demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully
remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to
Owner.
I
I
1.5
SUBMITf ALS
I
A.
Qualification Data: For demolition firm and refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Environmental-Protection, Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit
statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and
proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later
determined to be inadequate.
I
I
c.
Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
I
2.
3.
I
D. Inventory: After building demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
I
I
I
I
E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
I icensed to accept hazardous wastes.
F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced finn that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
I
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
I
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EP A notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A I 0.6 and NFPA 241.
I
BUILDING DEMOLITION
02221 - 2
E.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to building demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished.
Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review and finalize protection requirements.
3.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of Work.
B.
Owner will occupy another building immediately adjacent to demolition area. Conduct building
demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
I. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
C.
Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
a. Before building demolition, Owner will have been given five (5) days to remove
items to be salvaged. The five day grace period will begin one week after the
issuance date of the Notice to Proceed.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
2.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by
Owner under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
1.8
COORDINA nON
A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
BUILDING DEMOLITION
02221 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
building demolition required.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Engineer. Owner does
not guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in Project Record
Documents.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to Engineer.
E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
PREPARATION
A.
Refrigerant: Remove and store refrigerant according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
I. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
c.
Existing Uti I ities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,
removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility
disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
I. Remove and recycle refrigerant from air-conditioning equipment before starting
demolition.
D.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
I. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.
3.3 PROTECTION
I
I
BUILDING DEMOLITION
02221 - 4
3.4
3.5
I
I
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations.
I
B.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location during demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after
demolition operations are complete.
I
c.
Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remall1 and protect them against
damage during demolition operations.
I
1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless
authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to
Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
I
2.
I
a.
Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
I
DEMOLITION, GENERAL
I
A.
General: Demolish indicated eXlstll1g buildings and structures and site improvements
completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
I
1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
3. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
I
I
B.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
I
I.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
I
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
I
A.
Concrete: Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using
power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
I
B.
Masonry: Cut masonry at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven
saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
I
I
BUILDING DEMOLITION
02221 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
3.8
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished at junctures with
construction indicated to remain, then break up and remove.
D.
Carpet and Pad: Remove in large pieces and roll tightly after removing demolition debris, trash,
adhesive, and tack strips.
E.
Equipment: Disconnect equipment at nearest fitting connection to services, complete with
service valves. Remove as whole units, complete with controls.
F.
Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction.
G.
Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures.
1.
2.
Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings.
Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and disconnecting
devices.
SITE RESTORATION
A.
Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with clay sand structural fill.
B.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition
operations.
B.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new
materials.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's propelty, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EP A-approved landfill.
I. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
BUILDING DEMOLITION
0222 I - 6
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 02221
BUILDING DEMOLITION
02221 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
A.
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
Removing trees and other vegetation.
Clearing and grubbing.
Topsoil stripping.
Removing above-grade site improvements.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
DEFINITIONS
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay parti-
cles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; rea-
sonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter;
and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall be-
come Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without per-
mission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work
on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises
where indicated.
Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
SITE CLEARING
02230 - I
I
I
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Sec-
tion "Earthwork."
I
I.
Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available
on-site.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
3.3
PREPARA TION
I
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or
airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
I
c.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
I
D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
I
I.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
UTILITIES
I
A.
Contractor will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures be-
fore site clearing.
I
1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.
B.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
I
c.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permit-
ted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services ac-
cording to requirements indicated:
I
I.
2.
Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
I
D.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
I
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
I
A.
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to perm it installation of new construction.
Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.
I
I. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
I
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
3.6
I
3.
Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450
mm) below exposed subgrade.
Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
4.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further
excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and compact
each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials.
1.
Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste mate-
rials.
c.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
I. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).
2. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
3. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new
construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1.
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing
pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.
DISPOSAL
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
I
END OF SECTION 02230
I
I
I
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 3
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
Base course for asphalt paving.
Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for bur-
ied utility structures.
A.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
B.
I.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
2.
Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course! Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
F.
G.
H.
I.
EARTHWORK
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
I. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Engineer. Addi-
tional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for
changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m)
in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions
without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electri-
cal appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed
between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
02300 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
J.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K.
Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
L.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compli-
ance of the following with requirements indicated:
I.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
2.
3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to
ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permit-
ted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated:
I. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Co-
ordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
I
I
I
I
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combi-
nation of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, de-
bris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
c.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and
PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
I. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 2
2.2
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E.
Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural
or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve and not
more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
F.
Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or
crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more
than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
G.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and
not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
H.
Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural
or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a I-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more
than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
I.
Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve
and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
J.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a I-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0
to 5 percent passing a No.4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
K.
Impervious Fi II: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously in-
scribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
B.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket
for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep;
colored as follows:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARA TION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulat-
ing materials as necessary.
C.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
I.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in ex-
cavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excava-
tions. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
2.
EXCA V A TION, GENERAL
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
I.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCA VA TION FOR STRUCTURES
A.
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Ex-
tend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
I.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
EXCA V A TION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Ex-
cavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or con-
duit, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
B.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes
and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4
3.7
3.8
joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench sub-
grade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (I50 mm) in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multi-
ple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undis-
turbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (I50 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circum ference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with com-
pacted backfill or fill material as directed.
I.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
C.
Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess
yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Engineer.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCA V A TION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of con-
crete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may
be used when approved by Engineer.
I. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Engineer.
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
3.10
A.
Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without in-
termixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
I.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
I. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.12
I
I
I
I
I
3.13
.-
I
5.
6.
7.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
UTlLITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to pro-
vide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of con-
duits.
B.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom offootings; fill with
concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
c.
Provide 4-inch- (1 OO-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches
(750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in
a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
D.
Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a
height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.
E.
Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F.
Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
H.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches
(150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
FILL
A.
Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleteri-
ous materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
MOISTURE CONTROL
A.
Unifonnly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6
3.14
3.15
3.16
I
I
I.
2.
Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds opti-
mum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
I
COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
I
A.
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for ma-
terial compacted by hand-operated tampers.
I
8.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
I
c.
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698:
I
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300
mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (I 50 mm) below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent.
I
I
GRADING
I
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
I.
2.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
I
8.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub-
grades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
I
I.
2.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus I inch (25 mm).
Walks: Plus or minus I inch (25 mm).
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
I
3.
c.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a
I O-foot (3-m) straightedge.
I
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
I
A.
Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
I
I. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials
in a single layer.
I
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.17
I
I
I
I
3.18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.19
I
I
5.
When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials
in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm)
thick when compacted.
B.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral move-
ment. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact
simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
DRAINAGE COURSE
A.
Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1.
Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a
single layer.
When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in
equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick
when compacted.
2.
3.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subse-
quent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
c.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be perfonned at the following locations and
frequencies:
1.
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case
fewer than three tests.
Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet (30
m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each ISO
feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
2.
3.
E.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and re-
test until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
EARTHWORK
02300 - 8
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces be-
come eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or
weather conditions.
I. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recom-
pact.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.20
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MA TERlALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
1.
Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
02300 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
This Section includes the following for tennite control:
A.
I. Soil treatment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I
I
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.
A.
B.
PCO: Pest control operator.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label.
A.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of tennite control products certifying that treatments fur-
nished comply with requirements.
c.
Qualification Data: For finns and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for
Owner's record information, including the following as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Date and time of application.
Moisture content of soil before application.
Brand name and manufacturer oftenniticide.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
Areas of application.
Water source for application.
E.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdic-
tion to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and
has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a re-
cord of successful in-service performance.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply tenniticides, and label with a Federal registration num-
ber, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - I
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do
not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and re-
quirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 COORDINA nON
1.7
1.8
A.
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control
work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If
subterranean tennite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or
replace damage caused by termite infestation.
c.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and re-
treatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly
(or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State ser-
vices, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent,
and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to
plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiti-
cide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EP A-Registered Label.
B.
A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin.
American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department.
Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care.
DowElanco.
FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties.
Zeneca Professional Products.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
EXAMINA TION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other
conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manu-
facturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose
and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, form work, and construction
waste wood from soil and around foundations.
B.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease
treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previ-
ously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted
fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
c.
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with require-
ments of authorities having jurisdiction.
APPLICA TION, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manu-
facturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required
for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, ac-
cording to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and ver-
tical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute
the treatment evenly.
I.
Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including foot-
ings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before con-
crete footings and slabs are placed.
Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along
both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab,
and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter,
from grade to bottom of footing. A void soil washout around footings.
Masonry: Treat voids.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
c.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported
slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 3
I
I
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or
other construction activities following application.
I
END OF SECTION 02361
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART I - GENERAL
1. I RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt overlays.
4. Pavement-marking paint.
5. Wheel stops.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate
pavement shoulders.
2. Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving
terminations.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Standard Specification: As indicated.
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
I .4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
A.
Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
B.
Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
c.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.
Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol.
-
.
-
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
025 I I - I
F. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with
requirements indicated.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Samples: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum, of paving fabric.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material
complies with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt
paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
I. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with authorities having
jurisdiction or with the DOT of the state in which Project is located.
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction, based on Engineer's
evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the
experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the
Work.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction
for asphalt paving work on public property.
E.
Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook," except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section "Project Meetings" Review methods and procedures related to asphalt
paving including, but not limited to, the following:
I.
Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant
that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during
installation period and for remainder of construction period.
Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify
availability of materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to execute
the Work without delays.
Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed
installation procedures.
I
2.
3.
4.
I
I
5.
I
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for copmg with unfavorable
conditions.
1.6
DELlVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLlNG
A.
Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken
and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of
manufacture, and directions for storage.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature
range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively
damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at
time of placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C) at time
of placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials,
50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C)..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily m prevIous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed
blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured
blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
I. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with
ASTM D 242.
I
I
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
0251 I - 3
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM 0338 I for viscosity-graded material; ASTM 0 946 for penetration-
graded material.
B. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state DOT requirements.
C. Tack Coat: ASTM 0 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM 0 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
D. Water: Potable.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
B. Sand: ASTM 0 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115,
Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N.
D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-
1952.
I. Color: As required.
E. Glass Beads: AASHTO M-247.
F. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive
strength, approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide, and 84 inches (2130
mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch (J 9 mm), minimum length 14 inches (254
mm).
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
I. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Project is located.
2. Base Course: As indicated.
3. Surface Course: As indicated.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PA VING
025 I I - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for
Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types."
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Project is located.
2. Provide mixes complying with the composition, grading, and tolerance requirements of
ASTM 0 35 I 5 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:
a. Base Course: I inch (25 mm).
b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM 0 3910, consisting of emulsified asphalt, fine aggregates,
and mineral fillers and as follows:
I. Composition: Type 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
3.3
I
I
A.
Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
c.
Notify Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation
until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
COLD MILLING
A.
Clean existing paving surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling.
Remove existing asphalt pavement, including hot-mix asphalt and, as necessary, unbound-
aggregate base course, by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.
I. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.
Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches
(300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically.
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.
2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact
flush with adjacent surface.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 5
3.4
3.
Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while
still hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush
with adjacent surfaces.
I
I
I
B.
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat
concrete pieces firmly.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary,
crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.
2. Remove disintegrated or badly broken pavement. Prepare and patch with hot-mix
asphalt.
c.
Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of dense-graded, hot-mix
asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than I inch (25 0101) in existing
pavements.
I. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 2 inches (75 mm) thick.
D.
Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4
inch (6 mm). Refill with asphalt joint-filling material to restore watertight condition. Remove
excess filler that has accumulated near cracks or joints.
E.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt
pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. 01) of surface.
I
I. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. A void smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
I
I
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
I
I
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not
dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
B.
Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
I
I
I
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
c.
Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to
0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. 01). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not
flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1.
If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
I
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
025 11 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
3.7
.
II
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number oflifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of250 deg F (121 deg C).
3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 8 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill edge strips
of a lesser width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt
surface course.
c.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
JOINTS
A.
Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints
free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt
course.
I. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of24 inches (600 mOl).
4. Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as
described in AI's "The Asphalt Handbook."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
COMPACTION
A.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
025 I I - 7
3.8
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
I
I
I
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints
and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown,
grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix
asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations.
I
c.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while
hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. A verage Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM 0 204 I, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact
thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method.
F.
Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials.
Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by
rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G.
I
I
I
I
I
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
H.
Erect barricades as per SCOOT standards to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled
enough not to become marked.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 114 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B.
Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 1 O-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
I
I
I
1. Base Course: 114 inch (6 mm).
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 114 inch (6 mm).
3.9 ASPHALT CURBS
I
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PA VING
02511 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. I 0
3. I I
3.12
3.13
.
A.
Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat,
unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature
of250 deg F (121 deg C).
I. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
B.
Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard
shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal fonns. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed
to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.
SURFACE TREATMENTS
A.
Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.1 0 to 0.15 gaI./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.70 L/sq. m) to existing
asphalt pavement and allow to cure. Lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal with a fine
sand.
B.
Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to
cure.
I. Roll slurry seal to smooth ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engingeer.
B.
Allow paving to cure for 20 days before starting pavement marking.
c.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
I. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 Ib/gal. (0.72
kg/L).
WHEEL STOPS
A.
Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized steel dowels
embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to
pavement.
1. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches (125 mm) into wheel stop and lower portion a
minimum of9 inches (125 mm) into pavement.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 9
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perfonn field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM 03549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be
secured by testing agency according to ASTM 0 979.
I. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of
hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to
ASTM D 1559, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from 4
samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to
ASTM 0 204 I, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM 0 I 188 or ASTM 02726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to ASTM 0 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 02511
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PA VING
02511 - 10
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02821 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
I
P ART I - GENERAL
1. I RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2 SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Galvanized steel chain-link fabric.
Galvanized steel framework.
Concrete post footings.
I
B.
Related Sections include the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and for grading work.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete post footings.
Division I 6 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls,
limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches.
I
I
I
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute.
B.
Zn-5-Al-MM Alloy: Zinc-5 percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy.
I .4 SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for the following:
I
I
I
I. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Gates and hardware.
4. Gate operators, including operating instructions.
5. Delete subparagraph above and below ifno automatic gate operators.
I
I
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, rails, and tension wires and details
of extended posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories.
Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans,
elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and operational clearances, and
details of post anchorage and attachment and bracing.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
0282 I - 1
1.5
1.6
I
I
c.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of chain-link fences and gates certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
I
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
I
E.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of chain-link fence and
gate grounding and bonding with performance requirements.
I
F.
Maintenance Data: For the following to include in maintenance manuals specified In
Division I:
I
1.
Polymer finishes.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and
gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
I
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 19 I 0.7 or a
member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
I
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
I
c.
Source Limitations for Chain-Link Fences and Gates: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type,
and variety of component for chain-link fences and gates from one source with resources to
provide chain-link fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
I
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
I
I
I
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02821 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1
2.2
.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A.
Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: See contract drawings for fence height. Provide fabric
fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing in height of 12 feet (3.6 m) and less. Comply with
CLFMl's "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below:
I. Mesh and Wire Size: 9 Gauge coated wire fabric.
2. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, with zinc coating applied to steel wire before
weaving according to ASTM A 817, Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) with the following
minimum coating weight:
a. Class I: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. m) of uncoated wire surface.
3. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated during the weaving process with
manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
B.
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
RESIDENTIAL FENCE AND GATE FRAMING
A.
Round Posts and Rail: Cold-formed, electric-resistance-welded, steel pipe or tubing, with
minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and with outside dimension and minimum
wall thickness and weight complying with ASTM F 761 for the following fence height and
strength and stiffness requirements:
I. Fence Height: More than 4 feet (1.22 m) high and not exceeding 6 feet (1.83 m) high.
2. Line, End, Corner, and Pull Posts and Top Rail: Per requirements for Medium-Duty
Fence.
B.
Gate Posts, Gates, and Accessories: Comply with ASTM F 654 and the following:
I. Type: I, single swing.
2. Type: II, double swing.
3. Type: IV, double rolling.
4. Type: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel.
6. Frames: Fabricate from round tubing with outside dimension and minimum wall
thickness and weight according to ASTM F 654.
7. Posts: Round with outside dimension and minimum wall thickness and weight according
to ASTM F 654 for the following individual gate widths:
a. As indicated on construction drawings.
8. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, rolling gate
mechanism, center stops, hold backs. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for
padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.
a. Supply padlocks for all gates. Owner shall be supplied two (2) keys to each lock
during construction.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02821 - 3
2J
2.4
I
I
c.
Protective Coating for Steel: Posts, rails, and frames protected with an external coating of not
less than 0.6 oz. of zinc/sq. ft. (183 g of zinc/sq. m), a chromate conversion coating, and a clear,
verifiable polymer film; and an internal protective coating of not less than 0.6 oz. of zinc/sq. ft.
(183 g of zinc/sq. m) or 81 percent, not less than OJ-mil- (O.0076-mm-) thick, zinc pigmented
coating.
I
I
TENSION WIRE
I
A.
General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:
1. Location: Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric.
I
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: O. 177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wIre
complying with ASTM A 824 and the following:
I. Coating: Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by the electrolytic process, with the following
minimum coating weight:
a. Class 2: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. m) of uncoated wire surface.
I
I
FITTINGS
I
A.
General: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners.
Comply with ASTM F 626.
I
B.
Post and Line Caps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide
weathertight closure cap for each post.
I
I
I. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
c.
Rail and Brace Ends: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide
rail ends or other means for attaching rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D.
Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
I
1.
Top Rail Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or round steel tubing. Not less than 6
inches (153 mm) long.
Rail Clamps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide line and corner boulevard
clamps for connecting bottom rails in the fence line to line posts.
I
2.
E.
Tension and Brace Bands: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel.
I
F.
Tension Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel, length not less than 2 inches (50 mm) shorter than full
height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner
and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
I
I
G.
Truss Rod Assemblies: Hot-dip galvanized steel rod and turnbuckle or other means of
adjustment.
H.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: Provide the following types according to ASTM F 626:
I
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02821 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
I
1.
Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames,
complying with the following:
a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire; galvanized
coating thicklless matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.
2.
3.
Power-driven fasteners.
Round Wire Clips: Hot-dip galvanized steel or aluminum for attaching chain-link fabric
to H-beam posts.
Round Wire Hog Rings: Hot-dip galvanized steel or aluminum for attaching chain-link
fabric to horizontal tension wires.
4.
1.
Pipe Sleeves: For posts set into concrete, provide preset hot-dip galvanized steel pipe sleeves
complying with ASTM A 53, not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not
less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) more than outside dimension of post, and flat steel plate forming
bottom closure.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A.
General: Comply with ACI 30 I for cast-in-place concrete.
B.
Materials: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, aggregates complying with
ASTM C 33, and potable water for ready-mixed concrete complying with ASTM C 94.
Measure, batch, and mix Project-site-mixed concrete according to ASTM C 94.
1. Concrete Mixes: Normal-weight concrete with not less than 3000-psi (20.7- MPa)
compressive strength (28 days), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and I-inch (25-mm) maximum
size aggregate.
c.
Materials: Dry-packaged concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387 for normal-weight
concrete mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a
verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work,
and other conditions affecting performance.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02821 - 5
3.2
1.
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by
Engineer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet
(152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system,
underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.4
A.
General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent
requirements specified.
1.
Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.
B.
Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate 1'-0" wide by 1'-6" deep holes for posts to diameters
and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
1. Concealed Concrete Footings: Stop footings 2 inches (50 mm) below grade as indicated
on Drawings to allow covering with surface material.
2. Posts Set into Concrete in Voids: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches (125
mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than 00 of post. Clean holes of loose material,
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 30 degrees or more.
B.
Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet (3.05 m) o.c.
c.
Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull
posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two-thirds
fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under
proper tension.
D.
Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of
fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with O. 120-inch- (3.05-mm-)
diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches
(609 mm) o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric.
1.
2.
Top Tension Wire: Install tension wire through post cap loops.
Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches (150 mm) of bottom of fabric
and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GA TES
02821-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
3.6
I
I
I
E.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of
fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and
terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal
posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer.
F.
Intermediate Rails: Install in one piece at post-height center span, spanning between posts,
using fittings, special offset fittings, and accessories.
G.
Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts, using fittings and accessories.
H.
Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to inside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch (25.4 mm)
between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut
and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension
after pulling force is released.
I.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts
with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches (380 mm) o.c.
J.
Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire
at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach
other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to
individuals and clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches (304 mm) o.c. and to braces 24
inches (609 mm) o.c.
K.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the
fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.
GA TE INST ALLA TION
A.
General: Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure
for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using
tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
ADJUSTING
A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout
entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.
END OF SECTION 02821
I
I
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02821 - 7
SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING
PART I - GENERAL
\.I SUMMARY
1.2
\.3
A.
A.
B.
c.
A.
This Section includes the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Trees.
Shrubs.
Ground covers.
Plants.
Lawns.
Topsoil and soil amendments.
Fertilizers and mulches.
Stakes and guys.
Landscape edgings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape es-
tablishment.
I. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable
requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in
their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150
mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (IOO-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above ground
for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or
roots tip-to-tip.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site.
B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
c.
D.
Trees and Shrubs: Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Handle trees in a manner that will not injure tree
bark or branching. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect
bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and ty-
ing damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Pro-
vide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
Handle balled and bur lapped stock by the root ball.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
1.5
I
E.
Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and
install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set planting materials in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
I.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable mate-
rial.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as
necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
2.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner
which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually
agreed upon by parties concerned.
B.
Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse
drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Engineer before planting.
COORDINA TION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant mate-
rial required.
1.6 WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8.
Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one year after date of
Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects re-
sulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions un-
usual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
I. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Plants.
4. Grass and Sod
C.
Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding plant-
ing season.
D.
Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of war-
ranty period.
E.
A limit of one replacement of each plant material will be required, except for losses or replacements due
to failure to comply with requirements.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 2
I
I
1.7 TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain trees and shrubs by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting sau-
cers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position,
as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of in-
sects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. Maintain trees and shrubs for the follow-
ing period:
I
I
1.
Maintenance Period: 12 months following Substantial Completion.
I
1.8 LA WN MAINTENANCE
I
A.
Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is
established, but for not less than the following periods:
1.
Seeded and Sodded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
I
a.
When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is
not fully established at that time, continue maintenance during next planting season.
I
B.
Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other
operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth
lawn.
I
C.
Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water
from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (lOa mm).
I
1. Water lawn at the minimum rate of I inch (25 mm) per week.
D.
Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for principal
species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40
percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent
mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when
grass is wet.
I
I
E.
Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry.
I
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least I lb per 1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg per 100 sq.
m) of lawn area.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
I
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI 260.1, with healthy root systems
developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully-branched, healthy, vigorous stock
free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfig-
urement.
I
I
B.
Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI 260.1 for type of trees and
shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Engineer, with a propor-
tionate increase in size of roots or balls.
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical
and common name.
D.
Label at least I tree and I shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bear-
ing legible designation of botanical and common name.
2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and
caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60. I for type of trees required.
I.
Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
B.
Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and
type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.!, and stem
form as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Form: Single stem.
Form: Multistem, clump, with 2 or more main stems.
Form: Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems.
C.
Provide balled and burlapped trees.
2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
A.
Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and
measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
B.
Provide balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs.
I.
Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous
shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS
A.
Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape
required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1.
B.
Provide balled and burlapped coniferous evergreens.
I.
Container-grown coniferous evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped conifer-
ous evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.! limitations for container stock.
GRASS MATERIALS
A.
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts'
"Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum
percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as indicated on Sched-
ules at the end of this Section.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 4
I
I
2.6 TOPSOIL
2.7
2.8
2.9
A.
Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones I inch
(25 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials hannful to plant growth.
I
\.
Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to pro-
duce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil
when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement with imported top-
soil when required.
I
2.
I
SOIL AMENDMENTS
I
A.
Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate
equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent pass-
ing a No. 60 (250 micrometer) sieve.
I
\.
Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone.
I
B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
c.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials.
I
D.
Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
I
E.
Peat Humus: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially de-
composed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus, or reed-sedge peat.
F.
Water: Potable.
I
FERTILIZER
I
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
I
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric
acid.
I
c.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and
slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
potassium in the following composition:
\. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing agency (University of Georgia Extension Service).
I
MULCHES
I
A.
Organic Mulch: Organic mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees
and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
I
I. Type: Shredded pine bark at 3" deep minimum.
I
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5
I
I
I
2.10 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
I
I
2.11
I
I
I
I
2.12
I
I
A.
Sheet Polyethylene: Black, 0.006-inch (0.15-mm) minimum thickness.
STAKES AND GUYS
A.
Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated
softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indi-
cated, pointed at one end.
B.
Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class I, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted,
0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.
c.
Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter, black, cut
to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
D.
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4 inches
(102 mm) wide minimum, with stretch factor of33 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
3.2
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
EXAMINA TION
A.
Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting per-
formance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline ar-
eas, and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make minor adjust-
ments as may be required.
PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
A.
Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
B.
Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting
does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
I.
A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section.
C.
For tree pit or trench backfill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 6
3.4
3.5
I
I
D.
For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and
mix thoroughly before planting.
I
I. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-
tolerant plants.
2. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer, other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers, di-
rectly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling.
I
LA WN PLANTING PREPARATION
I
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
I
B.
Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other'extraneous materials.
C.
Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after light
rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen.
I
1.
Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of loos-
ened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture.
Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded.
I
2.
D.
Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by
excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare soil as follows:
I
1.
Remove and dispose of existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not turn over into soil being pre-
pared for lawns.
Till surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply required soil amendments and ini-
tial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Trim high areas and fill in
depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture.
Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harm-
ful to plant growth.
Remove waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of it off the
Owner's property.
I
2.
3.
I
4.
I
E.
Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted
in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 1-112 inches (38 mm) in any dimension,
and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.
I
I
F.
Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
G.
Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
I
EXCA V A TlON FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
I
A.
Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to
assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
I
I. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 1-112 times as wide as ball di-
ameter and equal to ball depth, plus the following setting layer depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 9 inches (225 mm) of planting soil.
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 7
I
I
I
I
2.
Container-Grown Trees and Shrubs: Excavate to container width and depth, plus the following
setting-layer depth:
a. Setting Layer:. Allow 6 inches (150 mm) of planting soil.
B. Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
E.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or
shrubs are encountered in excavations.
Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or reten-
tion in tree or shrub pits.
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before placing setting layer and positioning trees
and shrubs.
PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
Set balled and bur lapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent
finish grades as indicated.
1.
2.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not remove
from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if ball is
cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
backfill.
3.
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent fin-
ish grades as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When pit is approximately II2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
backfill.
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3-inch- (75-mm-) high mound around the rim of the pit. Do not
cover top of root ball with backfill.
Wrap trees of 2-inch (50-mm) caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Tape color shall closely resemble
trunk color. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of3'-0". Overlap wrap, exposing half
the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning,
and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
3.7 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
I
I
3.8
I
A.
Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect.
TREE AND SHRUB GUYING AND STAKING
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 8
,
3.9
I
I
A.
Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 12 feet (4.2 m) and more than 2.5-inch (75-mm)
caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm)
long, driven to grade. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade.
I
MULCHING
I
A.
Weed-Control Barriers: Install the following weed-control barriers according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations, before mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched, lapping edges a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm).
I
I. Material and Seam Treatment: Sheet polyethylene with seams taped.
I
B.
Organic Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of organic mulch and finish level with adjacent
finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
I. Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm).
I
3.10 SEEDING NEW LA WNS
3.11
3.12
I
A.
Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity ex-
ceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to
each other.
I
I. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B.
Sow seed at the following rates:
I. Seeding Rate: 3 to 4 Ib per 1000 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq. m).
I
c.
Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
I
D.
Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading wheat straw mulch after com-
pletion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg per 100 sq.
m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand,
blower, or other suitable equipment.
I
E.
Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours af-
ter completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of3116 inch (4.8 mm) thick
and roll to a smooth surface.
I
RECONDITIONING LA WNS
I
A.
Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations, including storage of materials or
equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition lawn areas where settlement or washouts occur
or where minor regrading is required.
I
I.
Recondition other existing lawn areas.
I
B. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.
I
c.
Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 9
I
I
I
A.. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
I
B.
Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades,
and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or re-
place damaged landscape work as directed.
I
3.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
I
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it ofTthe Owner's property.
I
3.14
SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE
I
A.
Full-Sun Mixture: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows:
I
Hybrid Bennudagrass
(Cynodon dactylon)
Min. Min. Pet.
Pet. Pure Sd.
Genn.
80 85
Max. Pct.
Weed Sd.
Proportion
Name
I
100 pet.
0.50
I
I
END OF SECTION 02900
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 10
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including form work, reinforcing, mix design,
placement procedures, and finishes.
A.
Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Foundation walls.
4. Equipment pads and bases.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds,
dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.
B.
Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and
arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings
through concrete structures.
C. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
D. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect.
Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from
admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings. "
ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.
3.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300- I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to design concrete
mIxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
2.3
-
I
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, lumber, or another acceptable material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
B.
Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of
350 gIL volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
c.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide
units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete
surface.
I. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the
concrete surface.
REINFORCING MA TERlALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
c.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D.
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports
complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base
material will not support chair legs.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type I.
I. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C.
;
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single
source.
1.
For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances
that cause spalling.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2
1.
J.
K.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
2.5
I
I
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used
when acceptable to Architect.
I
I
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than 3/4 inch
long.
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent
chloride ions.
G.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
H.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type.
Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
RELATED MA TERlALS
I
Reglets: See Division 7 Specifications.
I
I
Vapor Barrier (below slab on grade): See Division 7 Specifications.
Waterproofing: Polymeric surface waterproofing membrane composed of three products, a
waterproofing membrane, an impermeable vapor seal and a protection course. Sealtight Me1nar
by W. R. Meadows Co. or approved equal. See Division 7 Specifications.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN MIXES
I
I
I
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or
field experience methods as specified in ACI 301.
I. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight. Replace
cement with fly ash at 1.5 to 1.0 ratio.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have
been reviewed by Architect.
I
C. Adjustment to concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant,
as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must
be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 Ib per cu.
yd.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.7
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated.
Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
CONCRETE MIXING
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
introduced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarderlbarrier, and other related materials
with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static,
and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads.
Construct
formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position. Maintain form work construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying
with the following ACI 347 limits:
3.3 VAPORRETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
A. General: Place vapor retarderlbarrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with
direction of pour.
B. Lap joints per manufacturer's specifcations, and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic
or pressure-sensitive tape.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4
A.
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports
and as specified.
1.
A voiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and
concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by
Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward
exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
3.5 JOINTS
3.6
A.
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or
appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B.
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between
walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
c.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
constructionjoints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides
of strip placements.
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of
contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation
walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
J oint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7.
E.
Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contractionjoints in slabs-on-grade
to form panels of patterns as shown. Use full depth keyed joints or saw cut 1/8 inch wide by
one-fourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
Saw cut joints as soon as possible after slab finishing without dislodging aggregate.
Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7.
INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
I
3.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
A. General: Coat contact surfaces offorms with an approved, nonresidual, low- VOC, form-coating
compound before placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-
place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to
manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their
work.
B.
General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," and as specified.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed
on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to
avoid segregation at its final location.
D.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24
inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of
several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-
E.
spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of
concrete complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begyn to
set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate
concrete and complete embedment ofreinforcement and other embedded items witl10ut
causing mix to segregate.
I
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6
3.9
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement, other embedded items and into comers.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
I
I
I
I
2.
3.
F.
Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
I
G.
Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and
strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with provisions of ACI305.
I
I
I
I
I
I
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping
or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious
finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, and leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes,
brooms, or rakes. Slope surfaces to drains where required.
B.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,
membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
I. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until
ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface
water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of
power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-
floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. finish surfaces to tolerances of
F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness); [F (F) 15 min. local: F (L) 10 min.
local], measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
I
I
I
I
c.
Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab
surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quany tile, paint, or another
thin film-finish coating system.
1.
After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor
flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) [F (F) 15 min. local: f (L) 10 min. local] measured
according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
I
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I.
D.
Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set
mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the
surface with a fine broom.
E.
Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place,
and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
concrete
filling shown or required to complete Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
c.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide minimum 4" thick machine and equipment bases
and foundations or as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at
correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines
and equipment.
3.1 I CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
:1
I
I
I
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before
and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to
manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and
troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining
cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as
follows:
1.
Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8
3.12
I
I
2.
complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply
uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's
directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish
materials applied directly to concrete.
I
I
E.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full
curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods
specified above, as applicable.
I
I
F.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other
flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1.
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,
unless otherwise directed.
I
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
I
A.
General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
I
B.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following,
as directed by Architect.
I
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
a.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each
type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 23 I, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for
each set of compressive-strength specimens.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders
for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are
required.
I
I
b.
c.
I
d.
I
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each
concrete class placed in anyone day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens
tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
I
I
I
2.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch
iffewer than five are used.
When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect may
waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
I
3.
CAST-TN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9
I
I
I
4.
When strength offield-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no
individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
pSI.
I
5.
I
I
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer,
and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain
the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
I
I
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
I
E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results
indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure,
as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete
by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Retesting of
rejected, installed work shall be paid for by the Contractor.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 03300
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-10
I
I
SECTION 04100 - MORTAR
I
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
I
A. Shop drawings: None required
B. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for mortar to be used.
C. Samples required - supplied as a part of masonry sample panel.
I
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. The following named manufacturers and products will be accepted:
1. Marquette
2. Giant
3. Magnolia
4. Santee
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MA TERlALS
A. Prepared masonry cement will be used. Prepared masonry cement will comply with the requirements of
ASTM C91 and Fed. Specification SS-C-18Ie, Type II.
I
2.2 SAND
I
A. Sand shall conform to ASTM C144.
2.3
WATER
I
A. Potable
I
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. No antifreeze liquids or salts shall be used in the mortar in an attempt to lower the freezing point.
I
2.5 STORAGE OF MA TERlALS
A. Cementitious materials and sand shall be stored in a manner to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign
materials. Cement shall be stored with watertight cover and elevated above the ground. Do not use
hardened or partially set cement.
I
2.6 BRANDS
I
A. Brands of cementitious materials and the source of supply of sand shall remain the same throughout the
entire job and shall not be changed except by written permission of the architect.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
MORTAR
04100-1
I
I
I
3.1 PROPORTIONS AND STRENGTH
I
A. For concrete masonry units, face brick and other miscelaneous masonry above grade work mix - 1/2 part
Portland cement, I part masonry cement, and 2-114 to 3 parts damp loose mortar sand. Mortar shall
develop 1800 psi at 28 days (type S mortar).
I
I
B. For concrete masonry units, face brick and other miscellaneous masonry below grade work mix - I part
Portland cement, I part mortar mix, and 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose mortar sand. Mortar shall develop
2500 psi at 28 days (type M mortar).
3.2 WATER
I
A. Water shall be used in the quantity necessary to give workability.
3.3 MIXING
I
A. Add most of the water required to the machine mixer. Then add the masonry cement and 3 shovels of sand
to the water, allowing the mixer to work the cement and water into a slurry. Then add the balance of the
sand. Mortar shall be machine mixed for at least 3 minutes, preferably 5 minutes, after all the material is in
the mixer. Additional water should be added in small quantities until workability is attained.
I
3.4 USE
I
A. Time limits: Mortar shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours after mixing when the air
temperature is 80 deg. F. or higher. Mortar shall be used and placed in final position within 3-1/2 hours
when the air temperature is less than 80 deg. F. Mortar not used within these time limits shall be discarded.
I
B. Retempering: Mortars that have stiffened within the time intervals as determined above because of
evaporation of moisture may be retempered to restore workability by adding water. Enough water may be
added as is necessary to produce proper workability.
I
I
END OF SECTION 04100
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MORTAR
04100-2
I
I
SECTION 04150 - MASONRY ACCESSORlES
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
I
A. Shop drawings not required
B. Submit manufacturer's printed literature
C. SAMPLES REQUIRED - joint reinforcement
I
PART 2 - PRODUCT
I
2.1 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. All interior and exterior masonry walls shall have horizontal joint reinforcement at 16" o.C. or as indicated
on the plans.
I
B. Joint reinforcement shall be manufactured from cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82, and shall
consist of two deformed longitudinal side rods welded at 16" intervals to a continuous diagonal cross rod
forming a truss design.
I
C. Joint reinforcement shall be construction of No. 9 ga. cross and side rods, galv.
I
D. Width of joint reinforcement shall be 2" less than wall thickness. Cavity walls shall have a drip section in
cross rod at center of cavity.
I
E. Lap joint reinforcement 8" at ends.
F. The following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
I
Dur-O-Wall Truss type by Dur-O-Wall
Lox-All Truss type by Cumberland Corp.
Truss type by National Wire Products Co.
I
2.2 THRU-W ALL FLASHING
A. Thru-wall flashing shall be 20 mil thickness Black PYC Elastomeric Flashing equal to NU-Flex, as
manufactured by Sandell Manufacturing Co., Cambridge, Mass.
I
I
END OF SECTION 04150
I
I
I
I
MASONRY ACCESSORlES
04150-1
I
I
I
SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
I
PART I - GENERAL:
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
I
I
1.2
I
I
1.3
I
1.4
I
A.
Concrete masonry and brick, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Prior to starting masonry work, build sample brick wall approximately 4'-0" x 5'-0" to show facing range
and color and type and color of mortar joints for approval of the Architect.
B.
The finish work shall match the approved sample.
REGULATORY REQU]REMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code requirements for masonry construction.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather
Masonry Construction.
1.5 PROTECTION
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
A.
Protect facing from staining, keep top of wall covered with non-staining waterproof covering when work is
not in progress. When work resumed, clean top surface of loose mortar, and in drying weather, thoroughly
wet.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Pack, deliver and store masonry units to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spilling or other damage to
exposed faces. Store all masomy units on raised platforms and under ventilated and waterproof.
B.
Store protected, ventilated and covered concrete block units at project site for not less than 15 days before
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
I
I
I
I
2.2
-
A.
The following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
1. Face Brick:
Merry Brothers, Augusta, GA
Richtex Brick, Columbia, SC
Burns Brick Co., Macon, GA
2. Concrete Masonry Units:
Augusta Concrete B]ock Co., N. Augusta, SC
Williams Brothers, Atlanta, GA
Concrete Masonry Load Bearing Units - conform to ASTM C90 "Type N-I" for load bearing units,
manufactured using lightweight aggregate, conform to ASTM Spec. C33 ]-69 edition. Moisture content
UNIT MASONRY
04200-1
.
I
I
shall not exceed 30 percent of total absorption when delivered to the job.
2.3
UL Rated Units: Units are to be rated U-905 in accordance with UL 618 and to be Class D-2 units, and to
be laid in accordance with stated UL requirements for mortar, etc. Provide Architect with independent
laboratory certification that units were manufactured in accordance with UL specifications.
I
2.4
All masonry units shall be uniform in color and texture, free of chips and cracks and all comers shall be
sharp, square and true. CMU shall not sho'w effiorescence stains when tested in accordance with ASTM
C-67.
I
I
2.5 Face brick shaIl match existing.
2.6
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
I
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; hot dip galvanized cold-drawn steel.
I
B. Multip]e Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; with moisture drip; hot dip galvanized cold-drawn steel.
C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 ksi yield grade.
I
D. Sheet Metal Wall Ties: Corrugated, galvanized steel finish.
2.7 FLASHINGS
I
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90 finish, 26 gage core steel.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
I
A. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt.
I
B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials, recommended by
masonry unit manufacturer.
I
2.9 TEXTURE
A. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color of each kind required, for each
continuous area and visually related areas.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.] GENERAL
A. Handling and storage - Stack masonry units; store in manner that will protect them from contact with earth;
exercise care in handling units to avoid chipping and breakage.
I
B. All unfinished masonry shall be covered with a waterproof material to overhand the wall 2 feet and
weighted down. No masonry shall be laid when the temperature is below 32 deg. F. on a rising
thermometer or below 40 deg. F. on a falling thermometer unless adequate protection against freezing is
provided. In cold weather, masonry shall be protected against freezing for 48 hours after being laid with
the temperature on both sides of the wall maintained above 40 deg. F.
I
I
C. Building-In - Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar. Build-in work including anchors, finishings
and accessories as specified herein or noted on the drawings.
I
UNIT MASONRY
04200-2
I
I
I
I
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
I
I
I
-
I
-
.
-
COURSING
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
Masonry shall be plumb, level and true to line with full mortar joints.
Concrete Masonry Units: Lay in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
Form concave mortar joints. Masonry shall be plumb, level and true to line with full mortar joints.
Cut mortar joints flush where ceramic or quarry wall tile is scheduled, cement parging is required, resilient
base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive is applied, or bitumen damproofmg is applied.
Brick masonry units: Lay in running bond, stacked bond, soldier course, or rowlock as called for on
drawings. No chipped brick shall be laid in walls.
Brick shaIl be wet to insure each unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Do not wet concrete
block.
PLACING AND BONDING
Isolate masomy partitions from vertical structural framing members with a contro] joint as indicated.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with
compressible joint fiIler.
WEEPS AND VENTS
Install weep holes in veneer at 32" inches on center horizontally at bottom of walls.
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement] 6 inches oc. Place joint reinforcement continuous in fust and second
joint below top of walls.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend
minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16"oc.
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - VENEER MASONRY
Install horizontal joint reinforcement ]6 inches oc. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second
joint below top of walls.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend
minimum] 6 inches each side of opening.
Masonry Back-Up: Embed wall ties for bonding veneer at maximum 16 inches oc verticaIly and 36 inches
oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches
of openings.
D. Stud Framed Back-Up: Secure wall ties and embed into masonry veneer at maximum ]6 in. oc vertically
and 36 in. oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 in. oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 1'2 in.
of openings.
UNlT MASONRY
04200-3
I
I
D. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 in.oc.
3.10 MASONRY FLASHINGS
I
A. Extend flashings over veneer; turn up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry.
B. Lap end joints and seal watertight.
I
C. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and sealer.
I
3.11 LINTELS
A. Install loose steel lintels over window openings, door openings.
I
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not
scheduled. Cells shall be filled with concrete and shall have two continuous No.4 steel reinforcing bars as
indicated on drawings.
I
C. Maintain minimum 4 inch bearing on each side of opening.
I
3.12 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam and pilasters.
I
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
I
D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.
I
3.14 CONTROL [AND EXPANSION] JOINTS
A. Do not extend horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion] joints.
I
8. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of
the masonry unit. Fill the resultant elliptical core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for
placement of backer rod and sealant.
I'
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
I
D. Form expansion joint as detailed.
3.15 BUILT-IN WORK
I
A. As Work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood
nailing strips, fireplace accessories, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the Work furnished
by other Sections.
I
8. Bed anchors of metal door [and glazed] frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
I
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
I
UNIT MASONRY
04200-4
I
I
I
B. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
I
3.17 CUTIING AND FITIING
I
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and Coordinate with other Sections of Work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
3.18 PARGING
I
A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging.
I
B. Parge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to a total thickness of 1 inch; to a smooth steel trowel
finish.
3.19 CLEANING
I
A. Dry clean masonry of mortar stains and mortar spatter with wood scrapers.
I
8. Cut out all defective joints and repoint all holes in exposed masonry.
C. A commercial cleaner approved and recommended by the brick manufacturer shall be used. Do not use
muratic acid.
I
D. Cleaning shall be executed in accordance with commercial cleaner manufacturer's printed instructions
accompanying the material.
I
E. Soak area to be cleaned with plenty of water before applying cleaning solution.
I
F. Scrub brick not mortar joints.
G. Keep brickwork below area being cleaned soaked with water.
I
H. Throwaway cleaning solution when it becomes dirty and rinse. Brush frequently in clean water.
I. Wash wall thoroughly with plenty of water after scrubbing with cleaning solution.
I
3.20 CLEANING UP:
I
A. At completion, remove from the premises all excess materials, debris, rubbish and remove the sample panel
from the site when directed by the Architect.
I
END OF SECTION 04200
I
i
I
-
-
UNIT MASONRY
04200-5
I
I
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
I
A. Furnish and install wood material, rough hardware and accessories to complete rough carpentry work.
B. Miscellaneous plates and nailers, framing and bracing and brackets for mounting
accessories and equipment as shown on the Drawings.
I
C. Shims and plates for setting windows and doors.
I
D. Backing for telephone installation and other similar requirements.
I
E. Quality Standards:Unless otherwise specifically indicated, materials and workmanship for all woodwork
interior and exterior, shall conform to "Custom Grade" requirements of Architectural Woodwork Institute
Quality Standards.
I
F. Product delivery, storage and handling: Upon delivery to site, place materials in area protected from
weather.
I
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
GRADING REQUIREMENTS
I
A. Moisture content - not to exceed 19% for framing lumber, 12% for interior millwork and 15% for exterior
millwork.
I
8. Grade and Trade Mark: Required on each piece of lumber or bundle, use only official marks of
Association. Marks not required if each shipment is accompanied by Certificate of Inspection issued by
Association.
I
C. Quality: Sound and free from warp that cannot be corrected by nailing and bridging.
I
2.2 LUMBER
A. Lumber for wood plates, nailers, curbs, furring strips, rough work, blocking and grounds shall be No.2 KD
Southern yellow pine.
I
8. Plywood
I
I. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified herein,
plywood shall be grade stamped Douglas Fir plywood in
grades and types as follows:
I
a. For exterior use Grade EXT-DFPA, A-C
b. For interior use Grade INTERIOR A-C
c. Plywood for shelving shall be Grade INTERIOR A-A
I
2.3
ROUGH HARDWARE
I
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
I
I
I
I
A. General: All items of hardware exposed to weather or embedded in or in contact with masonry or concrete
shall be zinc-coated. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall be provided with standard steel washers.
I
B. Nails: Comply with Fed. Spec. FF-N-I01.
C. Screws: Wood screws; conform to "Standards of American Institute of Bolt, Nut and Rivet
Manufacturers". Furnish sizes, types and quantities to complete work.
I
D. Sleeve Anchor Bolts: (for attaching units to concrete masonry walls) Phillips Drill Co. Red Head Sleeve
anchors 3/8" x length required, round head. Where concealed, use cut steel washers, counter-sink heads.
I
E. Tite-Joint Fasteners (for fastening component units counter tops together): No.5 1 6 Tite-Joint Fastener as
manufactured by Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., Grand Rapids, Michigan.
I
2.4 PRESSURE TREATMENT OF LUMBER
I
A. All wood in contact with concrete, steel, stucco, masonry, roof deck or as noted on drawings, shalI be
pressure treated by one of the folIo wing methods:
I
I. 5% by weight Pentachlorophenol, by vacuum.
2. Osmose K-33
3. W olmanized, treated to 19% max. moisture content,
stamped "Dry"
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 FRAMING:
I
A. InstalI framing, blocking, furring, nailers and grounds as shown on the drawings and attach to building
structure with bolts. Bolts shall be drawn up tight and counter-sunk where shown on drawings.
I
END OF SECTION 06100
I
I
I
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-2
I
I
I
SECTION 06176 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
I
SUMMARY
I
I
A.
This Section includes wood roof trusses and truss accessories.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units conslstmg of metal-plate-
connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to
Project site.
I
I
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
I
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated.
Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
I
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span.
b. Roof Trusses: Horizontal deflection at reactions of 1-1/4 inches.
I
I
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type
of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material,
finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details.
I
I
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
B.
Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss
fabricating firm.
I
I
I
c.
Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer, professional engineer and fabricator.
D.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
I
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 1
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
1.7
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI
and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates
published in TPI 1.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engmeenng servIces
needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that
involves inspection by SPill, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source
from a single manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant- Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated
wood product through one source from a single producer.
E.
Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1. TPl 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."
2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI Hill, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
F.
Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFP A's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard
and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
COORDINATION
A.
Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying
progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified.
3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members,
graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding
allowable design values according to AFP A's "National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction" and its "Supplement."
2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with
requirements indicated below:
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G60 coating designation;
Designation SS, Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-I05.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1.
Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1..
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, ZInC plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class F e/Zn 5.
MET AL-PLA TE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
I
I
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
METALFRANITNGANCHORS
A.
General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and
size indicated, and as follows:
1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall
be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated
by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
c.
Truss Tie-Downs: As indicated
FABRICATION
A.
Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B.
Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in
TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1
I
I
INST ALLA TION
A.
Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B.
Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C.
Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
MET AL-PLA TE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176-4
3.2
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendati'ons and as indicated.
E.
Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F.
Space trusses 24 inches o.c.; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.
G.
Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through
each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and
written instructions.
H.
Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
I.
Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1.
Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord
floor trusses at centers indicated.
J.
Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
K.
Do not cut or remove truss members.
L.
Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in field.
REP AIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repaIr paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply
primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.
1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 06176
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop manufactured casework, hardware and attachment accessories.
I
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
I
A. Perform work in accordance with A WI Quality Standards.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
I
A. Upon delivery to site, place materials in area protected from weather.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
I
2.1 LUMBER:
I
A. Lumber for all exposed interior and exterior trim and woodwork, including frames, shelving, cabinets and
counters, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, shall be B and Better Douglas Fir.
2.2 PLYWOOD
I
A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified herein, plywood shall be grade stamped Douglas Fir
plywood in grades and types as follows:
I
1. For interior use, Grade INTERlOR A-C (installed with
"A" face exposed).
I
I
I
2. Plywood for shelving shall be Grade INTERIOR A-A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Install trim and millwork as shown on the drawings. Joints in trim shall be butt-type. Sand joint edges to
make tight fits and apply glue. Use fmishing nails and screws, which shall be set for puttying.
I
3.2
FINISH HARDWARE
A.
Cut and fit materials to receive hardware.
templates.
I
Install all hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's
i
I
B.
After installation, check all hardware for ease of operation. Apply oil and graphite for lubrication.
I
3.3
MILL WORK
A.
I
All millwork shall be constructed to follow designs shown and described using the materials shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
I
I
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
I
I
All joints shall be fitted using specified joining methods with blocking, screws and glue.
All wood members over 12" wide shall be glued-up and joined using no material wider than 12".
I
All millwork when delivered shall have all joints filled and exposed and usable surfaces sanded and
smooth, ready for finishing.
I
Install all millwork plumb, level, fitted and joined and attached to building structure.
I
Plywood shelving shall have hardwood edge, 1/2" thick, tongue and grooved to shelf.
DOOR GRlLLES
I
Door grilles furnished by Mechanical Division shall be installed under Carpentry and Millwork.
I
END OF SECTION 06200
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-2
I
I
I
SECTION 06220. MILL WORK - CABINETS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work for this Project.
I
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit shop drawings of all cabinet millwork items. Drawings
shall be from actual field measurements. Submit samples of: Plastic Laminate.
I
B. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard palette of colors in accordance with Section
01300.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
A. Upon delivery to site, place materials in area protected from weather.
1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS.
I
A. (AWl) 1995 Architectural Woodwork Institute, Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
I
A. Lumber for wood plates, nailers, blocking and grounds shall be No.2 KD Southern Yellow Pine.
I
B. Lumber for all exposed interior trim and finished millwork and woodwork, including frames,
cabinet shelves and cabinets, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, shall be Grade
A pine, for interior trim and Birch for cabinets.
I
C. Shelving shall be plastic laminate-faced plywood with vinyl edge.
2.2 PLYWOOD
I
A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified herein, plywood shall be grade-stamped birch
plywood in grades and types as follows:
I
B. For interior use Grade INTERIOR A-B. (Install with "A" face exposed.) Birch.
C. Plywood for concealed cabinet shelving shall be Grade INTERIOR A-A. Birch with solid birch
edging.
I
D. Plywood for countertops and backsplashes shall be 3/4" thick Grade EXT-APA, A-B with i
laminated surfaces.
I
2.3 MATERlALS
I
I
A. Plastic laminate shall be high pressure type being General Purpose Grade 10, suitable for
horizontal and vertical application. Plastic laminate shall meet NSF Standard No. 35.
Countertops - horizontal grade.
I
MILL WORK
06220-1
I
I
2.4 SURFACE FINISHES.
A. Surface finishes and colors shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard
color palette.
I
2.5
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS.
I
A. Formica Corporation
B. Eagle Picher Industries, Inc. (Lamin-art)
C. Nevemar
D. Westinghouse Micarta
E. Wilsonart
I
I
2.6
ROUGH HARDWARE.
I
A. General: All items of hardware exposed to weather or embedded in or in contact with masonry or
concrete shall be zinc-coated. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall be provided with
standard steel washers.
I
B. Nails: Comply with Fed. Specification FF-N-lOl and Standard Building Code 1994 Edition.
I
C. Screws: Wood screws, conform to "Standards of American Institute of Bolt, Nut and Rivet
Manufacturers". Furnish sizes, types, and quantities to complete work.
D. Sleeve Anchor Bolts (for attaching units to concrete masonry walls): Phillips Drill Company Red
Head sleeve anchors, 3/8" x length required, round head. Where concealed, use cut steel washers,
countersink heads.
I
2.4
FINISH HARDWARE
I
A. Pulls: 4" wire pulls - chrome finish.
I
B. Drawer Slide: Medium duty metal slides, bearing or wheel.
C. Hinges: Concealed medium duty 100 degree opening.
I
D. Adjustable Shelves: (inside cabinets):
Standards- 255 Knape and Vogt
Supports- 256 Knape and Vogt
I
2.5 PRESSURE TREATMENT OF LUMBER. (See Section 06100)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 WORKMANSHIP - FINISH CARPENTRY.
A. Install framing, blocking, furring, nailers and grounds, as shown on the drawings and attach to
building structure with bolts. Bolts shall be drawn up tight and countersunk.
I
B. Install trim and millwork as shown on the drawings. Joints in trim shall be mitered and butt as
required. Sand joint edges to make tight fits and apply glue. Use finishing nails and screws which
shall be set for puttying.
I
I
MILL WORK
06220-2
I
I
I
C. Cabinet Quality shall conform with AWl - Custom grade for materials and workmanship. Wood
Cabinets - reveal overlay. Stained birch fmish with two (2) coats polyurethane or lacquer fmish
with laminated counters and as detailed. Cabinet interior shall be stained and finished or
melamine laminated fmish.
I
I
D. Exposed shelving shall be laminate faced with vinyl edges.
3.2 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION.
I
A. Cut and fit materials to receive hardware. Install all hardware III accordance with the
manufacturer's templates.
I
8. After installation check all hardware for ease of operation. Apply oil and graphite for lubrication.
I
END OF SECTION 06220
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
MILL WORK
06220-3
I
I
SECTION 07176 - DAMPPROOFING WALL
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITI ALS
I
A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature of each item for approval
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MA TERlALS
I
WaIl Dampproofmg - spray applied
Acceptable manufacturers:
Sonnebom - Hydrocide 700B
Karmak Chemical Corp. - Karmak 220
W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Emulsion Type 2
I
I
(Asphalt base, clay emulsion with fibers, breathable dampproofmg compound brush or spray applied.)
I
2.2
MA TERrAL HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to job site in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's original labels.
I
8. Storage of materials shaIl be in dry location and protected against moisture and damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. WaIl dampproofmg shall be applied on all surfaces of D.M.U. occurring inside cavity walls, before brick
has been laid. Dampproofing shall extend from finished floor to full height of exterior wall.
I
B. Wall dampproofing shall be applied on face of all concrete block inside the cavity wall. Spray application
is to be on all surfaces for full height of walls to prevent efforescence. Dampproofing shall be applied in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
I
I
END OF SECTION 07176
I
I
I
I
DAMPPROOFING WALL
07]76-1
I
I
I
SECTION 07190 - VAPOR BARRIER
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Submit manufacturer's printed literature and application instructions for vapor barrier material.
I
B. Sample required.
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
I
1. V isqueen
2. Class-Kraft
3. Union Carbide Corporation
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 VAPOR BARRIER
I
A. Vapor barrier shall be a six (6) mil. in thickness, new unplasticized polyethylene film which has not been
previously used in any way.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's published directions accompanying material.
B. Lap joints 6" at sides and ends and turn up to top of slab at all vertical surfaces.
I
C. Where pipes and conduits protrude through compacted fill and vapor barrier, form polyethylene film
flashing skirts around same, securing with pressure-sensitive tape to insure a watertight seal.
I
D. Provide polyethylene patches over holes in vapor barrier caused by removal of screed stakes or supports.
Secure patches with pressure sensitive tape.
I
E. Vapor barrier shall be installed by an installer who is actively engaged in waterproofing and clampproofing
work and has completed work similar to that specified herein.
I
END OF SECTION 07190
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
I
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 Submittals:
I
A. Samples - Submit 2 samples of insulation specified in this section.
I
PART 2 - MA TERlALS
2.1 INSULATION BLANKET
I
A. Thermal mineral fiber, unfaced. Fuel contributed 0, smoke developed 0, flame spread 25. Meet Federal
Specs. HH-I-521E, Type III and ASTM C665.
I
I. 9" thickness - ceiling, unfaced
2. 3- 112" thickness - walls, faced
I
2.2 CA VITY WALL INSULATION
A. Insulation board whall comply with the Fed. Spec. HH-I-1972II, Class 2. The nominal insulation shall be 1-
1/2" and boardsize shall be 16" x 8'. Aged thermal resistance (R-Value) shall be R-16 at 40 degrees F.
mean temperature. Insulation board shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
Manufacturer shall be Thermax by Celotex or equaL
I
I
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
I
3.1 INSULATING BLANKETS (locations - above ceilings)
A. Install blanket insulation perpendicular to main tees of suspension system.
I
B. Install insulation w/tight butted joints.
I
END OF SECTION 07210
I
I
I
I
I
BUILDING INSULATION
07210-1
I
I
I
SECTION 07311 - COMPOSITION SHINGLES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
I
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
l.3
A.
1.4
A.
I
I
I
I
I
Granular, surfaced fiberglass shingle roofmg, underlayment, eave, valley and ridge protection,
with metal flashing.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics and limitations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Perform work in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not install eave edge protection and shingles when ambient temperatures are below 50 degrees F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOSITION SHINGLES
I
I
I
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
B.
e.
2.4
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Elk - Prestique I
Georgia-Pacific - Summit Series
GAF - Timberline
ACCESSORIES
Nails: Standard round wire shingles, hot dipped zinc coated, steel type of sufficient length to
penetrate roof sheathing.
FLASHING MATERIALS
Sheet flashing: ASTM A361; 24 ga. thick steel with minimum 1.25 ozlsf galvanized coating.
Bituminous paint: Acid and alkali resistant type, black color.
Nails: Standard round wire roofing type, hot dipped zinc coated steel: of sufficient length to
penetrate wood substrate.
FLASHING FABRICATION
Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings and to protect roofing materials from physical
damage and shed water.
B. Hem exposed edges of flashing minimum 1/4" on underside.
e. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of flashing.
COMPOSITION SHINGLES
I
073 1 I-I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
I
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
I
Verify that plumbing stacks and roof penetrations are flashed to deck surface.
Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids. Broom clean surfaces.
I
Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection.
INST ALLA TION - EAVE PROTECTION
I
Place eave and gable edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints and seal
with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails.
I
INSTALLATION - PROTECTIVE UNDERLA YMENT
Place one ply ofunderlayment over areas not protected by eave protection with ends and edges
weather lapped and nailed. Stagger and lap each consecutive layer.
I
B. Install perpendicular to slope of roof.
I
C. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. Items projecting through or mounted on roof.
3.4 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION
I
A. Place one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24" wide, centered over open valleys and
crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints and main in place.
I
B. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope to achieve
closed cut valley, concealing the valley protection.
3.5 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING
I
A. Weather lap joints and seal weather tight with plastic cement. Secure in place with concealed
fastenings.
I
B. Flash and seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic cement, weathertight.
3.6 INSTALLATION - COMPOSITION SHINGLES
I
A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
B. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
C. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with required weather exposure to produce double
thickness over full roof area.
I
D. Project first course of shingles 3/4" beyond eave boards.
I
E. Extend shingles 1/2" beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
F. Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles, maintaining weather exposure. Place to avoid
exposed nails.
I
07311-2
COMPOSITION SHINGLES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 07311
COMPOSITION SHINGLES
07311-3
I
I
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL FLASHING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
I
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
I
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof and sill flashing.
I
B. Gutters and downspouts.
C. Counter flashing over base flashings and vent stocks.
I
D. Precast concrete splash blocks.
I
1.3 DESCRlPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this
section.
I
lA JOB CONDITIONS
I
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and
finishes.
I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work shall comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the current edition of "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA).
I
I
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stack preformed and pre finished material to prevent twisting, bending or abrasion and to provide
ventilation.
I
1.7 GUARANTEE
I
A. The contractor shall guarantee all flashing to be watertight and perfect for a period of one (I) year and shall
make good during this period, without cost to the Owner, any damage caused by leakage.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET MA TERlALS
I
A. Sheet flashing: ASTM A361; 24 ga. thick steel with min. 1.25 oz./sf galvanized coating.
2.2
ACCESSORlES
I
SHEET METAL FLASHING
07600-1
I
I
I
I
A. Gutter and downspout anchorage devices:
SMACNA requirements.
B. Gutter supports: Bracket.
I
C. Downspout supports: Bracket.
D. Underlayment: No. 15 asphalt-saturated roofmg felt.
I
2.3 COMPONENTS:
I
A. Gutters: 3-3/4" x 5" ogee style profile, 20 ga., galvanized steel. (factory finish)
B. Downspouts: 3" x 4" rectangular style profile, 20 ga., galvanized steel. (factory fInish)
I
C. Splash blocks: Precast concrete type, 18" x 30", minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air
entrainment.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure flashing, gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
I
B. Fit components tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes and lines accurate
to profiles.
C. Slope gutters 114 "/ft. minimum.
I
D. Set splash blocks under downspouts.
I
E. Seal metal joints watertight.
I
END OF SECTION 07600
-
SHEET METAL FLASHING
07600-2
I
I
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
I
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
I
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Placement of joint fillers, backing, and sealants.
I
A. System performance to achieve moisture and air tight joint seals.
I
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRlPTION
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Perform Work in accordance with sealant manufacturers requirements for preparation of surfaces and
materials installation instructions.
I
lA ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
I
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CAULKING COMPOUND
I
A. Caulking compound shall be non-staining, non-sagging synthetic, one-part Type 19-GP-21 m acrylic latex.
I
2.2 SEALANT
A. Sealant shall be non-staining, non-sagging synthetic, one-part Type I 100% acrylic liquid ter-polymer
conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-230a.
I
2.3 ACCESSORlES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
I
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
I
C. Joint Backing: ASTM Dl056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger
than joint width.
I
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
I
2A COLORS
A. Caulking color shall be the following manufacturer's standard color:
I
JOINT SEALERS
07900-1
I
I
I
I
I
I. Off-white at aU painted surfaces.
B. Sealant colors shall be the following manufacturer's standard color:
I. Match adjacent material color.
2. Off-white (painted) at all painted surfaces.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work, and that joint measurements and surface conditions are as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C790 for latex base sealants.
INSTALLATION
Clean [and prime seal] joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Tool joints concave.
END OF SECTION 07900
I
-
JOINT SEALERS
07900-2
I
I
SECTION 081 10 - METAL DOORS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 See Door Schedule and Details on Drawings.
I
1.2 Shop Drawings and Samples:
A. Submit shop drawings (1 sepia and I print to Architect).
I
B. Submit manufacturer's drawings and schedules indicating type and construction for each door.
I
C. Samples required - none.
1.3
MANUFACTURERS:
I
A. The following names manufacturers will be acceptable:
I. Mesker Industries, Inc.
2. Fenestra, Inc.
3. The Ceco Corporation
4. Republic Builders Products Corporation
5. Pre-engineered Building Manufacturers - see Section 13120.
I
I
PART 2 - MATERIALS
I
A. Doors shall be 1-3/4" thick, constructed of two sheets 18 ga. cold-rolled streatcher - levelled quality steel as
shown on the plans. Top and bottom channels shall be 16 ga. spot welded to the door face on 4" centers.
Vertical channels shall be 12 ga., extending the full height of door leaf, and prepared for hinge and lock
mortises. Face sheets shall be welded to the vertical channels to develop full strength of the door. Edge
joint of face sheets shall be ftnished so joint is smooth and invisible.
I
I
B. Doors shall be primed painted inside and out. Doors shall be completely filled with foamed-in-place
urethane. Glass lite openings shall be provided as shown on the plans. Glazing beads, precut and mitered
shall be provided to hold 1/4" thick glass and shall be held in place without screws. Honey- comb, steel
ribbed reinforced or polystyrene fillers will not be accepted.
I
C. Doors shall be mortised for hinges and hardware as required by Hardware Schedule.
Reinforcement for surface-applied hardware shall be furnished where required by Hardware Schedule.
I
D. Hardware supplier shall furnish door manufacturer with templates.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
A. Install hollow-metal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Fit doors
to frames and floors with clearances specified in SDI-IOO.
I
END OF SECTION 081 10
I
METAL DOORS
08110-1
I
I
I
SECTION 08115 - METAL DOOR FRAMES AND SPECIAL WINDOW FRAMES
I
p ART I - GENERAL
I
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES:
A. Submit shop drawings (1 sepia and 1 print to Architect).
I
B. Submit schedule and details for each frame required.
C. Samples required - none.
I
1.2
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
1. Ceco Steel Products Corp.
2. Amweld
3. Fenestra, Inc.
4. Pioneer
I
I
I
PART 2 - MA TERlALS
2. 1 METAL FRAME
I
A. Form frames of steel to sizes and shapes as detaiied on the drawings. Frame shall be combination type with
integral trim and fabricated with-full welded type construction at joints.
I
B. Metal frames: Cold-rolled, pickled and oiled, steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate frames
from 16 ga. steel. Hot dip galvinized at exterior locations.
I
C. Provide concealed metal reinforcements for hardware. Gauges of metal for reinforcement shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of hardware and thickness and width of doors to
be hung in the frame, provided that gauges used are not lighter than those required by Commercial
Standards CS 242.
I
D. Finished work shall be strong and rigid and free from defects. Fabricate molded members straight and true
with comer joints well formed, in true alignment and with fastenings concealed.
E. Miter joints for welded type frame and continuously arc-weld for full depth and width of frame and trim.
All contact edges shall be closed and all welds on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush.
F. Prepare frame at factory for installation of hardware. Welding of hinges to frames will not be permitted.
Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. Punch door frame to receive rubber door silencers.
Furnish three silencers with frame per door leaf.
G. Provide metal anchors of shapes and sizes adjoining type of wall construction. Fabricate jamb anchors of
steel, not lighter than gauge used for frame. Locate anchors on jambs near top and bottom of each frame and
at intermediate points not over 24" apart, and as follows:
1. For frames set in masonry walls: Provide standard "T" type anchors: Three per jamb.
H. Provide floor clips of not less than 16 ga. steel and fasten to bottom of each jamb member for anchoring
frame to floor construction.
METAL DOOR FRAMES AND SPECIAL WINDOW FRAMES
08115-1
I
I
2.2
PRIME COAT PAINTING
I
A. Units to be cleaned after fabrication, removing all rust, scale, grease, oil and rough spots. Treat surfaces
with phosphate compound to assure max. paint adherence. Apply spray coat of rust inhibitive primer.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
A. Set frame in position, plumb, align and brace until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frame to
floor. Secure wall anchors to adjoining construction as indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
I
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect frame from damage during transportation and at job site. After installation, protect frame from
damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced
with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.
I
3.3 CLEANING UP
I
A. At completion, remove all excess materials and all debris. Leave work in a clean condition for receipt of
work to be installed under other sections of these specifications.
I
END OF SECTION 08115
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
METAL DOOR FRAMES AND SPECIAL WINDOW FRAMES
08115-2
I
I
I
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS
I
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
I
A. Shop drawings and samples:
I
1. Submit shop drawings on:
Wood doors: 1 sepia and 1 print to Architect.
I
B. Samples required: None
I
C. Guarantee - Doors shall be guaranteed for a period of two years from date of substantial completion of the
project against defects in material and workmanship that will render the doors as unsuitable for the purpose
for which they were manufactured. If any door proved defective in materials or workmanship within the
two-year guarantee period, it shall be replaced, rehung and refinished, without additional charges to the
Owner.
I
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
I
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Algoma, Wisconsin
2. Egger Plywood Company, Two Rivers, Wisconsin
3. Paine Lumber Company, Oshkosh, Wisconsin.
4. Weyerhaeuser Company
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
I
A. General Requirements
I
1. All wood doors shall meet or exceed NWMA Industry standard I.S. 1-83 Series and the requirements
of A WI Quality Standards for Premium Grade Doors, Section 1300.
2. The door's final thickness shall be 1-3/4" as covered in the above standards.
3. Wood used in the construction of the door shall be thoroughly seasoned, kiln-dried wood with a
moisture content not less than 5% and not greater than 8%.
I
B. Core Construction: Solid core shall meet ANSI 208.1- 1 L 1.
I
C. Edge Bands: The stile edge bands shall be a 2-ply edge bond laminated to the core on four (4) sides per
SWI 1300-G-3, Spec.' Symbol PC-5, PC-7 or PC-HPL with Type II highly water-resistant glue, using the
high frequency method. The outer tyile shall be a species compatible with face. Two-ply rails of mill-
option hardwood shall be used. Stiles and rails must measure a minimum of 1-3/8" after trimming.
I
I
I
D. Cross Bands: Cross bands shall be thorougWy oven-dried hardwoods, 1/16" minimum thickness extending
the full width of the door and laid with the grain at right angles to the face veneers. .
I
E. Adhesives: Cross bands and faces shall be laminated to the cores with Type I, Melamine Fortified Urea
glue, by the hot plate process.
I
WOOD DOORS
08210-1
F. Cutouts for Lights and Louvers
1. Edge of opening shaH be no'nearer than 5" to any edge or top of the door, and no nearer than 8" above
the bottom of the door. Where kick plates occur, bottom of opening shall be 2" above kickplate.
2. There shall not be less than 5" between any light and/or louvers, cutouts for locks, closers or other
hardware cutouts.
3. Cutout areas (louver area and/or glass area) shall not exceed 40% of the area of the door and neither
shall the cutouts exceed one-half the height of the door.
G. Face Veneers
I. Interior door - any commercially available veneer as specified. Face veneers must have minimum
thickness of .020" prior to factory sanding. Veneer shall be premium grade birch for staining or
painting under Section PAINTING.
2. Face veneers shall meet Spec. per AWl 200-S-7 or ANSIIHPMA HP 1983 Table 2
H. Metal stops for wood panels shall be furnished under Division 8.
2.2 STORAGE
A. Doors shall be stored flat, above floor, in manner to provide proper ventilation and to prevent warpage or
other damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Accurately fit and install doors in locations shown; provide sufficient tolerances to prevent binding or
excessive margins during temperature changes. Ease edges of doors on 1/8" radius. Fit doors with hardware
specified in Division 8; instaHed in accordance with requirements therein.
END OF SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
08210-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08340 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
A. Furnish and install Model PFI-IF RolIing Counter Doors as manufactured by ComelI Iron Works, Inc.
I
8. Opening preparation, miscellaneous or structural metal work access panels, finish or field painting,
electrical wiring, wire, conduit, fuses and disconnect switches are in the Scope of Work of other divisions
or trades.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURER
I
A. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. or equal.
2.2
MATERIALS
I
A. Curtain to consist of#IF, interlocked flat-faced slats, 1/2" deep of .040" thick aluminum. Molded high-
strength nylon end locks riveted to ends of alternate slats. Bottom bar to be extruded aluminum tubular
section with continuous lift handle and vinyl astra gal.
I
B. Guides to be heavy duty extruded aluminum sections equipped with polypropylene pile runners and snap-
on trim to cover fasteners. Attach guides to jambs with 1/4" bolts, spaced not more than 12" apart.
I
C. Counterbalance shaft assembly shalI consist of steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum
deflection of 0.03" per foot of width and helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of
door in insure that effort to operate door will not exceed 15 pounds. Provide wheel for applying spring
torque and for future adjustment.
I
I
D. Brackets shall be reinforced steel plate to support counterbalance assembly, form end closures and provide
mounting surface for securing end of hood.
I
E. Hood shaH be 0.04" thick aluminum. Intermediate supports shall be provided as required to prevent
exceSSIve sag.
F. Operation to be Push-up.
I
G. Equip door for latching by coil side slide bolts.
2.3
FINISHES
I
A. Aluminum to be clear anodized 204, R- 1 finish.
I,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. InstalI doors in accordance with Cornell Iron Works, Inc. instructions.
I
8. InstalIation shall be by authorized ComeH Iron Works, Inc. distributor or representative.
I
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08340- 1
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall supply a certificate stating that all materials and finishes will comply with the
specifications.
END OF SECTION 08340
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08340-2 I
I
I
SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
A. Doors, frames, facing, trim members and related items shall be as manufactured by Kawneer Co.,
Inc., Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. or Armarlite Corporation.
I
B. For the purpose of establishing size, type, finish, quality and other requirements, materials as
manufactured by Kawneer Co. have been incorporated in the details and are specified herein.
I
C. Shop Drawings - Submit to the Architect for approval complete drawings indicating dimensions,
anchorage and fastenings, details of construction, adjacent materials, accessories and metal
finishes.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 Materials
I
A. Doors and frames shall be fabricated of 6063 T5 extruded aluminum. Transoms and sidelights
shall be as shown on the drawings.
I
B. Finish and color for all aluminum doors and frames shall be hardcoat anodized:
I
1. Finish shall be Aluminum Association M-C22-A42 Architectural Class I with minimum
coating thickness of 0.7 mils.
2. Color shall be Kawneer No. 40, "Dark Bronze," Kaiser Kalcolor "Statuary Bronze", or Alcoa
Duranodic No. 313, "Dark Bronze." No lacquer is required.
I
C. Doors shall be as indicated on the drawings, finish as specified above.
I
I. Stile and rail glazed doors shall be Medium Stile "350" doors.
2. Doors shall have pile weathering on 3 sides and pile sweep at
bottom.
I
D. Framing Members shall be TRI-FAB "450" framing for 1I4" tempered glazing. Include all grid
frames; vertical, comer, and horizontal mullions; transom bars; bases; glazing assemblies;
transition members for connecting the components; adapters; mountings and anchors; reinforcing
where required; trim mouldings and facing materials. Framing members shall be 2" x 4-1/2".
I
I
E. Framing Members receiving glass shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight
lines, and no projecting stops or face joints. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for
glass by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass, and be designed for double
insulating type glass. Framing members shall be 2" x 4-1/2"
I
F. Hardware shall be furnished and installed with the doors and frames and shall have the same finish
as the doors and frames.
I
I. Cylinder locks shall be as specified in Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
2. Push-pull hardware for the "350" Medium Stile doors shall be Style "T" pull and Style "V"
push plate and cross bars.
3. Closers shall be provided at all doors and shall be overhead surface mounted closers.
4. Hinging shall be offset pivot type.
5. Flush bolts shall be provided in inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
6. Thresholds shall be aluminum, 4" wide.
I
I
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08400-1
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
e.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
WORKMANSHIP
I
All items shall be set in their correct locations as shown on the drawings and shall be level, plumb,
square and at their proper elevations and in alignment with alI work.
I
AlI joints between the metal and masonry shalI be tightly caulked to secure a watertight job.
All metal shalI be screwed to backing or to plugs in masonry or anchor straps.
I
DAMAGED COMPONENTS
I
Damaged or scratched components shalI be removed and replaced. Field repairs and touch-up
painting shall not be acceptable except upon written approval of the Architect.
CLEANING
I
Prior to fmal inspection, remove any protective materials and clean with plain water and soap or
household detergent.
I
END OF SECTION 08400
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08400-2
I
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
I
-----
I
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Approval Schedule
I
I
1. Prior to delivery of hardware, prepare and submit six (6) copies of completed schedules of finish
hardware for approval.
2. Schedule: Show type, manufacturer's name, item number, location and finish of each item. Approval
of schedule will not relieve contractor of responsibility for furnishing hardware to complete work.
B. Samples required-None
I
1.2
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Finish hardware: For the purpose of designating type and quality for work under
this section, materials are based on the following manufacturers:
I
1. Sargent and Co.
2. Stanley Hardware
3. ScWage Hardware
4. Pemko Hardware
5. Rockwood Hardware
6. Ives Hardware
7. N orton Hardware
I
I
I
I.3 PACKING AND MARKING
A. All hardware shall have the screws, bolts, and fastenings for its installation, packed in the same package
with the hardware. All packages shall be legible and adequately labeled, indicating the location for which
they are needed.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FINISH
A. Finish shall be US 26D for locks and hardware. Butts shall be P.
I
2.2
KEYING
A. Grandmaster keyed to new master key system.
I
B. All locks shall be individually keyed except within
individual groups, which will be keyed alike as indicated
I
C. The key side of all locks will be on the public side.
D. Two keys will be provided for each keyed lockset.
I
E. Five (5) master keys shall be furnished.
I
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-1
2.3 WEATHERSTRIPPING:
I
I
A. All exterior doors shall receive Pemko, extruded aluminum
weatherstripping at jambs, head and sill.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
INST ALLA TION
I
I
Install hardware in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and templates. Set hardware
accurately and securely anchor with attachment devices; set screws level, flush and draw up tight.
I
Upon completion, hardware shall operate freely with proper tolerances to prevent binding and/or
malfunctioning. Make necessary adjustments and leave clean.
I
Cut and fit thresholds to profile door frames, with mitered corners and hairline joints. Cut smooth openings
for spindles, bolts, and similar items, if any.
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws of the proper type for permanent anchorage
and/or bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal.
I
Set thresholds in a seal of butyl rubber sealant or poly-isobutylene mastic sealant. Install sealant under
interior edge allowing any water entering through screwholes to weep out exterior edge.
I
PART 4 - FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
,I
EASTVIEW COMMUNITY CENTER
I
I Dr. 2 Ext. from Senior Room
I Dr. 3 Ext. form Youth Room
3 Pair StainlessButts
2 Panic Devices
2 Closers
2 Kick Plates
2 Threshold
2 Set Weatherstrip
2 Sweeps
2 Rm Cylinders
Pr. Alum Dr. 1 Ext from Lobby
2 Mort. Cylinders (SL)
All other hardware by door supplier
FINISH HARDWARE
HDW SET 1
(SG)
(SG)
LHR 3070x 1-3/4
RHR 3070xl-3/4
(ST) FBBI91-32D4-I/2x4-1/2NRP
8813 ETL-US32DxMK
EN351-PSxTB
(RW) 8 x 34 32D .050
(P) 171 A-36"
303A V-36x84"
3l5CN-36"
20-00 I =626xmk
.1
I
I
(P)
(P)
(SC)
I
HDW SET 2
I
ALxAL
20-013 x Dr.color
I
I
08710-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
1
1
1
1
1
9
6
6
Dr. 4 Senior Room from
Conf/Reading
Dr. 1 7 Youth Room from Storage
Dr. 1 8 Youth Room from Study
Dr. 8 Hall to Kitchen
Dr. 10 Senior Room from Office
Dr. 13 Youth Room from Office
Pair Butts
Lockset (SC)
Stops
3
1
2
1
Pr. Doors 5 Senior Room
from Janitor Closet
Pair Butts
Lockset (SC)
Surface Bolts (I)
Stop
HDW SET 3
RHR
LHR
RHR
LH
LHR
RHR
(ST) F179-26D 4-112 x 4-1/2
AL53PD SAT626 x MK
(RW) 440-26D
HDW SET 4
RHR Active
(ST) F179 26D 4-112 x 4-112
AL53 SA T626 x MK
454F2C-8"
(RW) 440-26D Active Door
HDW SET 5
I
1
1
I
12
8
8
8
8
8
Pr. Doors 7 Senior Room from Hall
Pr. Doors 1 1 Senior Room to Lobby
Pr. Doors 15 Youth Room to Hall
Pr. Doors 12 Youth Room to Lobby
Pair Butts (ST) FBBI79 26D 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
Closers (NO) 160IBF ALxTB
Push Plates (RW) 70B-32D3-112xI5
Pull Plates (RW) BF125x70B-32D
Kick Plates (RW) 8x34-32D.050
Stops (RW) 440-26D
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Dr.6 Hall to Men's Toilet
Dr. 16 Hall to Women's Toilet
Pair Butts
Closers (NO)
Push Plates
Pull Plates
Kick Plates
Stops
Mop Plates
FINISH HARDWARE
-
-
-
HDW SET 6
LH
RH
(ST) FBB179 26D 4-112 x 4-1/2
1601BF ALxTB
(RW) 70B-32D 3-1/2 x 15
(RW) BF125x70C-32D
(RW) 8 x 34-32D.050
(RW) 440- 26D
(RW) 4 x 35 - 32D.050
0871 0-3
Mr\!:. List:
ST
SG
SC
NO
RW
P
I
Roll-up Door 9 at Kitchen
I Roll-up Door 14 at Kitchen
All hardware by door supplier
Stanley
Sargent
ScWage
Norton
Rockwood
Pemko
Ives
END OF SECTION 0871 0
FINISH HARDWARE
HDW SET 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08710-4 I
I
I
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work required for this Project.
1.2 SCOPE.
I
B. All doors, windows shalI be glazed as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.3
SUBMITI ALS
I
A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300
lA
PRODUCT HANDLING
I
A. Exercise care in handling to prevent damage.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
I
A. All doors and windows shall be glazed as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Glass
shalI be float glass installed as follows:
I
B. Clear: 1/4" clear for interior windows. (unless noted as fIre rated).
I
C. Insulating Glass: Insulating glass shall be Class A preassembled units of dual-seal construction
consisting of lites of glass separated by an aluminum spacer and dehydrated space conforming to
ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774. Aluminum spacer shall be roll-formed, with bent or tightly
soldered joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon
vapor transmission into airspace through the comers. Primary seal shall be compressed
polyisobutylene and the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone. Glass types shall
be as follows:
I
I
D. Temper: 1/2" tempered glass as required for doors and as noted on the drawings.
Tempered glass shall be kind FT fully tempered transparent flat type, Class I -clear,
Condition A uncoated surface, Quality q3 - glazing select.
I
E. Mirrored Glass: 1/4" silver plated mirror. Glass for mirrors shall be Type I transparent flat type,
Class I - clear, Glazing Quality ql 6A rom (1/4 inch) thick conforming with ASTM C1036. Glass
color shall be clear. Glass shaU be coated with silver coating, copper protective coating, and
mirror backing paint conforming to FS DD-M-4l 1. Silver coating percent or more of incident
light when viewed through 6A rom (1/4 inch) thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects.
Copper protective coating shall be pure bright reflective copper, homogeneous without sludge,
pinholes or other defects, and shall be of proper thickness to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror
backing paint. Mirror backing paint shall consist of two coats of special scratch and abrasion-
resistant paint applied, and shall be baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silv~r
and copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.
I
I
I
-
GLAZING
08800-1
--
I
I
2.2 MIRROR ACCESSORlES
A. Mastic: Mastic for setting mirrors shall be a polymer type mirror mastic resistant to water, shock,
cracking, vibration and thermal expansion. Mastic shall be compatible with mirror backing paint,
and shall be approved by mirror manufacturer.
I
8. Mirror Frames: Mirrors shall be provided with mirror frames (J-mold channels) fabricated of one-
piece roll-formed Type 304 stainless steel with No.4 brushed satin fInish and concealed fasteners
which will keep mirrors snug to wall. Frames shall be 31.8 x 6.4 x 6.4 mm (1-1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4
inch) continuous at top and bottom of mirrors. Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall
construction material shall be provided with mirror frames.
,I
I
C. Mirror Clips: Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material shall be provided with
clips.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 GLAZING
A. The Glazier must examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, stop design, and
the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Architect in writing of
any conditions detrimental to the timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing
installation until weather conditions and work is prepared and acceptable.
I
I
Install setting blocks at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead
compound.
8.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
I
Provide spacers inside and out for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches.
Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated.
I
Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops and eliminate discolorations.
CURE, PROTECTION AND CAULKING
I
Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface
durability.
I
B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, with crossed
streamers.
I
C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during the construction period.
I
D. Maintain glass in a clean condition during construction, to avoid damage due to corrosive action.
I
END OF SECTION 08800
I
I
GLAZING
08800-2
I
I
I
SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
I
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum board with taped and sanded joint treatment.
I
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Perform Work in accordance with GA20l - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings and GA2l6 -
Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
I
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
I
A. Manufacturers:
1. Gold Bond
2. U. S. Gypsum
3. Bestwall
I
B. Fasteners: ANSI!ASTM C514 nails.
I
C. Gypsum Board Types: 1/2 inch thick, 5/8" thick Type "X" and "C", maximum permissible length; ends
square cut, tapered edges; unless noted otherwise in the following Paragraphs.
I
D. Standard Type: ANSI!ASTM C36
E. Moisture Resistant Type: ANSI! ASTM C630.
I
I
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Comer Beads: Metal.
B. Joint Materials: ANSI!ASTM C475 reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
I
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
B. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with nails.
C. Place comer beads at external comers. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board
abuts dissimilar materials.
I
3.2 JOINT TREATMENT
I
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive fmishes.
I
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
09260- 1
B. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 ft in any direction.
END OF SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
09260-2 I
I
I
SECTION 09300 - TILE WORK
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
A. Description of the work: Furnish and install ceramic tile as shown and specified. Tile will not be
required on walls or floors behind or under built-in cabinets.
I
B. Quality assurance: Furnish ceramic tile complying with Standard Grade requirements of ANSI
AI37.1. Handle, store, mix and apply setting and grouting materials in compliance with reference
standards and manufacturer's printed instructions.
I
C. Product Handling: Deliver and store packaged materials in original container with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time to use.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 QUARRY TILE
I
A. Material shall be standard grade quarry tile ground (4) four sides after firing and conforming to
ANSI AL37, L-L980. color and size shall be selected by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
QUARRY TILE INSTALLATION
I
A. Install on slab-on-grade construction where no bending stresses occur.
8. Mortar bed shall be uniform in thickness ofa nominal 1-1/4".
I
I
C. Materials:
I
I. Portland cement - ASTM C- 1 50 type 1.
2. Sand - ASTM C-144.
3. Water - potable
4. Mortar - 1 part Portland cement, 6 parts damp sand by volume.
5. Bond coat - Portland cement paste on a plastic bed, or dry-set mortar or latex - Portland
cement mortar on a cured bed.
6. Grout - ANSI Al 18.6 sand-Portland cement or latex Portland cement.
I
D. Slab shall have screed finish and free of cracks, waxy or oily films, and curing compounds.
E. Maximum Variation in the slab shall not exceed 1/4" in 10'-0" from the required plane.
I
F. Installation specifications:
-
I
1.
2.
Tile - ANSI Al 08.1
Grout - ANSI Al 08.1 0
I
END OF SECTION 09300
-
TILE WORK
09300-1
I
I
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Submittals: In addition to product data for each type of acoustical panel and suspension system required,
submit the following:
I
A. Extra Materials
I
1. Provide extra ceiling panels to owner at the completion of the project. Two ceiling panels per 1000 sq.
ft., minimum. in an unopened carton.
2. Set of 12 inch (300mm) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for
each color and system type required.
3. Acoustical panel ceilings indicated are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fIre
resistance per ASTM E 119. Fire-resistance-rated, acoustical panel ceilings are indicated by design
designations listed in the UL "Fire Resistance Directory," in the Wamock Hersey "Certification
Listings," or in the listing of another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
I
A. ~1 - (Lobby, Seniors' Room. ConflReading Room. Office, Hall, Youth Room, Storage & Study Room)
Wet-Formed mineral fiber acoustical panel. Factory applied vinyl latex paint. Type III, Form 2.
Pattern: Fissured non-directional.
Color: White
Light Reflectance:White-Actual LR .80
SS-S-I 1 8B and ASTM E 1264.
Weight: .60Ibs/S.F.
Size:24" x 24" x 5/8"
Edge Detail:Square-cut Lay-in
NRC:0.55
CAC:Minimum .35
I
I
I
I
Surface-Burning characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 1264
Flame spread 25 or under
UL labeled
I
Approved Manufacturer: #770 Cortega Minaboard - Armstrong
Hytone Baroque - Celotex
Auratone Omni Fissured - USG
I
B. Type 2 (Janitor's Closet-Kitchen, Men's Toilet & Women's Toilet)
I
Wet-Formed mineral fibers with vinyl faced membrane:
Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E (non-perforated)
Color: White
Light Reflectance: Actual LR 0.83 (non-perforated)
Size 24' x 24" x 5/8"
Weight: 1 .05/1bs S.F.
I
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09511-1
I
I
I
I
Edge Detail:Square-cut, lay-in
NRC:.l 0 (non-perforated)
CAC:Min. 40 (non-perforated)
RH 90 Performance - no visible sag under conditions, not to exceed 90% humidity and 104 deg. F
(40 deg.C)
I
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A (Flame Spread 25 or under)
UL labeled.
I
Approved Manufacturer: VL RH 90 Fire Guard (non-perforated) #868
Armstrong
Metal FacelClear Room - USG
Metal Guard (non-perforated) Celotex
I
I
C. Suspension System Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table
I, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
I
D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,
with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that impo~ed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E
1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency.
I
E. Wire Hangers. Braces. and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
Zinc-coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A64l (ASTM A 641M) Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
I
Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct
Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch (2.69 rom) diameter
wire.
I
I
F. No-Fire-Resistance-Rated. Direct-Hung Suspension Systems: Provide manfacturer's standard metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and fmishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C635 requirements:
I
Hot Dipped Galvanized Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System as manufactured by Armstrong World
Industries, Inc., conforming to ASTM C635, intermediate duty, exposed tee: components die cut and
interlocking, color to match ceilings, rotary stitched.
I
Commercial quality cold rolled steel with hot dipped galvanized coating.
I
G. Hot Dipped Galvanized Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee System as manufactured by Armstrong World
Industries, Inc. conforming to ASTM C635, intermediate duty, exposed tee; components die cut and
interlocking, color to match ceilings, rotary stitched.
I
H. Components: Grid to be used with Ceramaguard RHl00 shall be Prelude Plus by Armstrong, double-web
hot dipped galvanized steel, with a corrosion-resistant aluminum cap, USDA acceptance, and conforms to
ASTM C635 for Severe Environmental Performance.
i
I
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty. Four foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 Ibs. per lmear
foot and also be rated intermediate duty. I
2. All 4" cross tees shall be rotary stitched, to increase durability and add column strength to the system.
3. Main Beam HD-7200 shall have a web height of 1 1/2" and the 4 ft. and 2 ft. cross tees, HD 7240
and HD 7228 shall have a web height of I 1/2". Each flange shall be 15/16" pre finished aluminum
capping, and the system will have removable and reusable cross tees.
I
I
-
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09511-2
4. Wall moldings shall be 15/16" x 15/16" (HD 7831)
I. Finish: All steel roll-formed parts, including cap, shall be cleansed
and hot-dipped galvanized with override cross tees. All exposed surfaces
shall then receive a baked polyester paint finish.
J. Color shall be white and match the actual color of the selected tile unless otherwise specified. Off white is
not acceptable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook".
B. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers as follows
1. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to support above. Connect hangers either
directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for
substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
2. Space hangers not more than 48 inches(1200 rom) o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 rom) from ends of
each member.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary
to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
G. Provide additional 12 ga. galv. wire hangers where light fixtures occur as follows: One (I) wire hanger at
each comer of recessed light fixtures and two (2) wire hangers above each surface mounted light fixture
(provided by ceiling subcontractor).
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.
B. Touch-up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.
C. Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09511-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
I
1.1
I
I
C.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Shop drawings not required.
8. Submit manufacturer's printed literature.
Samples required - samples of manufacturer's standard colors for color selection.
MAINTENANCE DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS:
Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the work, furnish two (2) copies of a list of recommended
maintenance methods and procedures.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Furnish additional vinyl composition tile of each color included in the work at the rate of 1 carton for each
2,000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof.
MANUFACTURERS:
For the purpose of designating type and quality for work under this section, materials specified are based
on products manufactured by Armstrong Tile Co. for floors and bases and Mercer for thresholds.
B. The following names manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
Floor, base, stair treads and risers:
Type 1:
I.
2.
3.
Threshold:
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong Tile Co., Excelon Imperial Series
Kentile Floors, Inc. Avanti Series
Azrock Floor Products, Custom Cortina Series
Mercer
Johnson Rubber Co.
R. C. Musson Rubber Co.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Conform to Fed. Spec. SS-T-3 l2A, Type IV, 12" x 12" x 118". Armstrong Excelon Imperial Series.
2.2 VINYL BASE
I
I
A. Shall be 4" high as called for by finish schedule. Base shall be straight type at carpet and coved type at
resilient floors. Thickness shall be 1/8". Use premoldedexternal and internal comers, which 'Patch,
approved base. Vinyl base shall conform to all applicable provisions of Federal Spec. ZZ-T-301A. ;
2.3 THRESHOLDS
I
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-1
A. Shall be tapered vinyl from 1/8" to 3/16" and located at transitions from vinyl composition tile (1/8") to
concrete, Terrazzo.
2.4 ADHESIVE AND PRIMERS
A .Approved tile and base manufacturer, or manufacturers, shall provide the Architect with written
recommendations for approval of adhesives and primers they propose to use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., in all locations for a min. of 48 hours before and after
installation of vinyl composition tile and base.
B. Deliver all materials during the 48 hour period specified and allow to condition at least 24 hours before
installation. Adhesives and primers shall be delivered in sealed containers bearing approved manufacturer's
labels and applied in accordance with manufacturer's strict directions.
C. Prime all floor surfaces after they have been cleaned and dried. Fill cracks, joints and depressions with
underlayment recommended by approved tile manufacturer. Mix underlayment and apply in accordance
with approved manufacturer's directions to required thickness. It shall be compacted, troweled smooth and
allowed to become hard and dry before tile is laid.
D. Installation of tile will be construed to mean that concrete sub-floors are entirely satisfactory to the tile
installer to produce a smooth, level and acceptable tilefloor covering in every respect.
E. Lay tile flooring in accordance with approved manufacturer's printed instructions to true, straight lines,
level and smooth surface. Layout tile for each space to be symmetrical about center lines of room or space
and so spaced that edge or border tiles are one-half tile or greater in size. Make up any irregularities at
perimeter of spaces. Place tiles squarely against each other and press into cement to insure complete
contact and adhesion. Cement shall not extrude onto face of any tile. Press tile into place before cement
has set and not later than one hour after tiles are laid. All tile shall be laid with "grain" or pattern in same
direction. No "checkerboard" pattem will be accepted.
F. Defer laying tile until all other work that may cause damage to same is complete.
G. Provide threshold strips at all exposed edges of tile with top surface finishing flush with tile.
H. Provide premoulded base in standard lengths, including premoulded external and intemal comers. Set base
straight and level in adhesive with close, flush joints hermetically sealed by adhesive. Remove all traces of
adhesive, stains and dirt from face of base.
3.2 FINISHING AND CLEANING:
A. Upon completion of the installation of floor covering and adjacent work, and after materials have set, clean
surfaces with a neutral cleaner as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of floor covering material
installed.
B. Protect completed work from traffic and damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.l
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
I
I
I
I
I
.
CARPET
SCOPE
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, vinyl strip and accessories required to
properly install glue down on all carpet in a workmanlike manner.
SUBMITIALS:
A. Submit complete color selections available. Samples to be exact samples of material proposed for use.
B Submit two (2) drawings, for approval, showing layout of seams, all edge conditions and conditions where
joined or butted to adjacent materials.
C. Submit manufacturer's maintenance manual in three (3) copies
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpet manufacturer shall have been manufacturing commercial carpeting continuously for a period of 25
years.
B. Carpet other than that specified under "products" must be approved by the Architect 10 days prior to bid
date. To obtain approval the carpet contractor shall submit to the Architect samples of all materials
specified herein. These samples shall be accompanied by a certification from the manufacturer certifying
equal qualification with every requirement as specified herein.
C. Qualifications of Installers: All work shall be done only by authorized installation crews endorsed by
Manufacturer. All adhesives, seam sealers and seam cleaners must be those approved by Manufacturer.
D. Notice is hereby made that strict adherence to this Specifications will be required by the Architect and that
the Contractor shall receive no compensation for losses in replacement of goods disapproved. The
Contractor shall certify that all materials supplied against this contract meet or exceed the standards
established under "Products", and are guaranteed free from manufacturing defects for one (1) year.
SITE VISIT
This contractor shall visit the site and be responsible for all measurements and job conditions.
HANDLING AND STORAGE
All carpeting shall be delivered to the job site in original mill wrappings with each roll having its register
number properly attached; clearly marked as to size, dye lot and materials.
Materials shall be stored in an enclosed and dry area protected from damage and soiling. Coordinate
location or storage area within building with General Contractor or PrincipaVDirector.
GUARANTEES & WARRANTIES
Upon completion, the carpet manufacturer must submit a certificate guaranteeing carpet against defects for
a period of three (3) years.
09680-1
B. Upon completion, the carpet contractor must submit a certificate guaranteeing the installation to be free of
defects in workmanship for a period of one year to include the statement that: The carpet contractor shall,
at his own expense and upon written notice from the Architect, promptly correct/replace any and all
improper work and material that may become apparent within twelve(12) months after the date of final
completion.
C. Carpet manufacturer must certify by register and roll numbers that carpet shipped for this project complies
with all requirements of the Specifications subject to normal manufacturing tolerances.
D. Manufacturer shall. furnish to the owner his standard warranty for fifteen (15) years. Yarn manufacturer
year written warranty for colorfastness, 5 year warranty written warranty to atmospheric contaminants, and
lifetime static warranty (3.5 kv or less). Written warranties must be included with product submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All carpet shall be first quality of American manufacture and all yarn shall be of domestic origin.
Approved manufacturers are:
I. Milliken - Comfort Plus, with enhancer plus Cushion
2. J & J - Reliance with Thermal Lock Backing
3. Mohawk - Performer with Primex PLB Backing
4. Lees Commercial Carpets - Faculty IV with Unibond backing
B. Tufted Level or Multilevel Loop
C. Face Yam - 100% type 6.6 Antron Legacy BCF (Bulk Continuous Filament) nylon with DuraTech soil
protection by Du Pont.
D. Finished Pile Weight - 26 ounces per square yard (min).
E. Face Weight - The ounces per square yard shall not be more than one half ounce under the specified
amount.
F. Dye Method - Solution Dyed or Yam Dyed - colorfastness on millitron quadrotech.
G. 160 Xenon ARC light hrs. minimum.
H. Pile height - .171 inch
I. Total weight - 75 ounces per square yard
J. Antimicrobial an integral part of the carpet.
K. Gauge - 1/8
L. Stitches per inch - 8.5
M. Primary backing - polypropylene
N. Secondary backing - Thermoplastic, vinyl or urethane (if urethane has been chosen, it may have backing
density of 18 Ibs. per cu. ft. ASTM D3676-78 and woven scrim only). Unibond, Primex PLB, Endure,
CARPET
09680-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.PVC-free comfort, plus cushion.
I
O.
O. Denier - 4,800.
I
P. Density Factor - 5,000.
Q. Width - 12' or 3' x 3'.
I
R. No Delamination - Guaranteed for Life
S. Flammability - Floor Radiant Panel ASTM E-64f8 NFPA-253 Class I
I
T. NBS Smoke ChamberASTM E-662 450 or lessNFPA - 228
I
U. Turf Bind (Loop Pile) Wet or Dry STM DI335 20 Ibs. (guaranteed for life)
V. Backing Adhesion - ASTM D3926.80 10-20 Ibs./in.
I
W. Lightfastness - AATCCI6E-1982 160 Std. fd. hrs.
X. No Edge Ravel. Wet or Dry - Guaranteed for Life
I
Y. Testing: Successful bidder shaIl furnish three copies of reports of test results by an independent testing
laboratory of tests made for each of the performance criteria herein listed. The owner, at his option, may
order additional tests made on any portion of furnished fabric for conformance with his criteria. These
tests, if ordered, will be at the expense of the owner if material is compliant with specifications. If material
is non- compliant with specifications, the successful bidder wiIl bear all testing costs, and replacement
cost.
I
I
Z. Colors - Standard colors as selected by ArchitectlSchoollDepartment.
I
PROPOSED ALTERNATES - must be running line products available in both cut and roll quantities, no special
runs or special constructions will be accepted.
2.2
INSPECTION:
I
A. Report to the General Contractor and Architect, in writing, any imperfections, unacceptable conditions
and/or corrections required to be made before commencing work of this section. Commencing work of the
section denotes acceptance of Subcontractor and all surface and conditions affecting the work of this
section.
I
I
B. Surface to receive carpet must be free of dirt, visible moisture and irregularities. Carpet instaIler IS
responsible for cleanliness of floor.
I
C. Property Damage by Contractor: Any damage done to paint, walls, floors, etc. shall be the responsibility of
the carpet contractor.
-
I
Required repairs shall be made by the proper trade contracted on the work of this project who will be required to
make the repair and paid by the carpet subcontractor for the repair work. :
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
INSTALLATION
.
CARPET
09680-3
A. Existing or previously treated substrate, on existing floor, with respect to wax, soap or other residual
buildup must be removed prior to installation.
B. Carpet shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures as outlined in
Manufacturer's Carpet Specifier's Handbook.
C. Adhesive shall be recommended by manufacturer. Where primers/sealers are used, their compatibility with
adhesive must be verified.
D. Seaming: All selvages are to be trimmed to ensure good side seams. All seams are to receive a coating of
seam sealer applied to base and side of pile yam thus securing breadth-to-breadth and end-to-end. Carpet
shall be installed the full length of corridors to minimize the number of seams. Piles should run the same
direction when adjoining other breadths of carpet.
E. Contact adhesive shall be applied in six inch bands at all cross (butt) seams.
F. All seams must be kept to a minimum, invisible as possible, and following the approve seam layout
drawings.
G. Where carpet meets dissimilar floor surface, proper vinyl binder bars shall be used.
H. Carpet shall be installed wall-to-wall, using continuous lengths in as broad a width as possible. Cut edges
shall be trued and appropriately treated to form non-revealing joints where exposed. No cross-joints will be
allowed in any area.
3.2
CLEAN UP:
A. Upon completion of the instalIation, the contractor shall remove all waste and excess materials, all tools
and equipment, and shall carefully and thoroughly vacuum the entire floor surface with an upright beater-
bar type vacuum cleaner to the Architect's satisfaction.
3.3 EXCESS CARPET
A. All usable pieces of carpet not necessary to complete the work are to be left on the job site and placed in an
orderly manner in such areas as designated by the owner. A piece of scrap carpet or a rug is to be put at the
entrance to any carpeted area so as not to get carpet soiled. If carpet gets dirty and will not come clean, the
carpet installer shall replace carpet to Architect's satisfaction.
3.4 BASE
A. New rubber base shalI be installed on all walls in all areas obtaining new carpet. Base material shall be 4"
cove (if existing base is larger, match existing size.). Colors of base shall be from Group I, II, III or IV, as
manufactured by Roppe Rubber Corp. Preformed insideloutside corners and stops shall be used.
END OF SECTION -09680
CARPET
09680-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Shop drawings not required.
I
B. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for each type paint selected.
I
c. Samples Required - Color cards of manufacturer's standard colors for color selection.
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. For the purpose of designating type and quality for work under this subdivision, materials specified are
based on products manufactured by Glidden.
I
B. Products ofthe following named manufacturers wilI be acceptable:
I
1. Glidden Paint Company
2. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Industries
3. Sherwin Williams
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 PAINT, ENAMEL AND PAINT MATERIALS
I
A. Shall be delivered to the job in the can in which it was originally packaged by the manufacturer. Cans shall
be unbroken and shall bear a manufacturer's label showing the name of the manufacturer and describing the
paint materials contained therein.
I
2.2 MATERIALS
I
A. Shall be used directly from the can in accordance with the manufacturer's directions contained on the label
of the can for the type of work involved. Thinner or other dilution shall be permitted only as provided as in
manufacturer's directions, and then in compliance with the manufacturer's directions.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
I
A. If woodwork, metal or surfaces to be finished cannot be put in condition for finishing by cleaning, sanding
and puttying operations, notify Architect in writing.
B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be cleaned before painting.
I
C. Touch up knots, pitch streaks and sappy spots of wood surfaces to be painted with shellac prior to painting
with oil paint.
I
D. Rub surfaces with sandpaper to obtain smooth surface prior to application offust coat.
-
.
W<
PAINTING
09900-1
E. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. Use wire brush or sandpaper to
remove rust and scale. Clean shop coats of paint that have become marred and touch up with primer.
F. Remove grease, stains, mortar blobs, loose particles, and dust from masonry surfaces by cleaning with stiff
wire brush.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Protect work at all times with covering. Remove or protect hardware accessories, plates and lighting
fixtures.
B. Miscellaneous ferrous surfaces shall be cleaned and primed the same day.
C. All prime and fInish coats shall be applied smooth and uniform, free of skips, runs and sags. No materials
shall be spread over an area greatly exceeding label coverage recommendations. All work shall be done
under electric light so that skips and sags may be seen and corrected.
D. No oil paint, enamel, varnish or stain shall be applied to any surface which is damp. None of these
materials are to be used outdoors when rain, fog, dew or wind are present or likely to occur.
E. No coating shall be applied unless the temperature is above 60 degrees F., or above 50 degrees F. and
nsmg.
F. No surface shall be recoated until the previous coat is dry.
G. Colors shall be as directed by the Architect. Color panels shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted
for approval by the Architect. Architect shall inspect all prime coats for approval and may make changes to
shade and color only.
H. After completion, remove runs and touch up fInishes where damaged. Remove doors and fInish top and
bottom of wood doors. Clean paint from all adjacent surfaces, hardware, glass, floors and tile.
3.3 SCHEDULE FOR EXTERIOR PAINTING:
Surface
Prime (No. Coats)
Finish (No. Coats)
Ferrous
Glidden #4570
Galv. Metal Primer
(1)
Glidden #5229
Galv. Metal Primer
(1)
Glidden #1800
Endurance House Paint
(2)
Glidden #1800
Endurance House Paint
(2)
Galv. Metal
3.4 SCHEDULE FOR INTERIOR PAINTING
Surface
Prime (No. coats)
Finish (No. Coats)
Millwork,
Cabinets & Open
Shelving (Not
indicated as stained)
Glidden #555
Undercoat (1)
Glidden Spread Luster
(2)
Ferrous Metal
Glidden #4570
Metal Primer
Glidden Spread Luster
Semi-Gloss Enamel (2)
PAINTING
09900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ferrous Metal
(exposed struc-
tural steel)
Galvanized Metal
Wood Doors &
Stained Millwork
I
Toilets
(enamel) (1)
Gyp. Board
I
I
I
Concrete Block
END OF SECTION 09900
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
.
-
PAINTING
Spot Primer with
Factory Primer
Glidden #5229
Galv. Metal Primer
(1)
Glidden Oil
Base Stain (1)
Glidden Primer#4570
Glidden Latex Primer
Glidden Block Filler
Glidden Spread Luster
Semi-Gloss (2)
Glidden Spread Luster
Semi-Gloss Enamel
(2)
Glidden Stain
Sheen Varnish (2)
Glidden Spread Enamel
(2)
Glidden Spread Latex
Semi-Gloss Enamel (2)
Glidden Spread Latex
Semi-gloss enamel (2)
09900-3
I
I
SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS
I
PART I - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work required for this Project.
I
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The publication listed below forms a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
I
FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (FS)
I
FS RR-P-1352 (Rev C) Partitions, Toilet, Complete
1.3
DESCRIPTION
I
A. Toilet partitions, including toilet enclosures, room entrance screens, and urinal screens, shall
conform to the layouts shown. Color of materials shall be as selected from the manufacturer's
standard colors.
I
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITIALS:
I
SD-04 Drawings: Toilet Partitions and accessories. Drawings shall show plans, elevations,
details of construction, hardware, reinforcing, fittings, mountings, and anchorings.
I
SD-14 Samples: Toilet Partitions. Manufacturer's standard color charts and color samples.
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
TOILET ENCLOSURES
I
A. Toilet enclosures shall conform to FS RR-P-1352, Type I, Style C, overhead braced, floor
mounted. Width of toilet enclosures shall be as shown. Finish surface of panels shall be
laminated plastic. Panel indicated to receive toilet paper holders or grabbars as specified in
Section 10800 TOILET ACCESSORlES shall be reinforced for the reception of the items
required.
I
B. Accessories shall be chrome plated brass or stainless steel. "Zamac" hardware is not permitted.
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Toilet partitions shall be installed straight and plumb with all horizontal lines level and rigidly
anchored to the supporting construction. Where indicated, anchorage to walls shall be by through
bolting. Drilling and cutting for installation of anchors shall be at locations that will be concealed
in the finished work.
I
I
TOILET PARTITIONS
10160-1
I
I
I
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
I
I
I
I
B. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open
at approximately 30 degrees when unlatched. Toilet partitions shall be cleaned and protected from
damage until accepted.
END OF SECTION 10160
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
TOILET PARTITIONS
10 160-2
SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK
I
I
I
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work for this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOM SIGNS
I
I
A. Signs shall be surface 1/32" raised letter printed. System consists of Photopolymer film pressure
and heat laminated to the surface of a matte finish clear 1/8" thick. Sign shall have minimum
1/16" thick laminated backplate. Comply with A.D.A., 1993, signage requirements for letter size,
sign size, braille and mounting heights.
I
B. Signs shall be minimum size as scheduled. Top half shall have room number in background of
matte black or dark color with white lettering. Bottom half shall have same background with
white lettering. All lettering shall be Helvetica medium I" high upper case, unless otherwise
noted. Background color shall be selected by Architect.
C. The following sign manufacturers are approved
I. Supersine Company
2. Vomar Products, Inc.
3. Mohawk Engraving Co., Inc.
4. Spanjer Brothers
5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
6. Andco
7. Multigraphics
8. American Graphics
9. Kroy
2.2
SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
Location
Lobby, Door #1 1
Lobby, Door #12
Lobby, Office Window
Seniors' Room, Door #4
Seniors' Room, Door #5
Youth Room, Door #17
Youth Room, Door # 18
Hall, Door # 8
Hall, Door # 6
Hall, Door # 16
SPECIALTY SIGNS
SignagelSymbol
Seniors' Room
Youth Room
Office
Conference
Janitor
Storage
Study
Kitchen
"MEN", wi ISA Symbol
"WOMEN", wi ISA Symbol
I
I
I
I
I
Size
I
3" x 18"
3" x 18"
3" x 15"
3" x 18"
3" x 15"
3" x 15"
3" x 15"
3" x 15"
8" x 8"
8" x 8"
I
I
I
I 0440-1
I
I
I
SECTION 11450 - RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 This section shall include:
A. Refrigerator (N/C)
B. Range
C. Range Hood (See Mechanical)
D. Under Counter Ice Machine
E. Disposal
I
I
I
1.2 WARRANTY
A. Provide a three-month warranty - minimum.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
ALLOW ANCE
I
A. Allow an allowance of $ 1 ,500.00 for appliances only. Contractor shall be responsible for all connections
and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
I
A. Verify that openings and utility services are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed
by the manufacturer.
I
B. Set and adjust units level and plumb.
C. Activate units to confIrm correct operation.
I
END OF SECTION 11450
I
I
.
-
-
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
11450-1
I
I
2.3 HANDICAP PARKING SIGNS
A. Signs shall be installed at each handicap parking stall, 1/8" aluminum sheet, 18" x 24" with the
universal symbol and the words: "PERMIT PARKING ONLY" "TOW A WAY ZONE"
"MAXIMUM FINE $500.00" "VAN ACCESSIBLE" and shall be mounted on 2" x 2" x 8' steel
posts, set in 2 cubic feet of concrete. Post minimum height is 6'-0" to the bottom Handicap signs
to comply with A.DA 1993 Standards and Richmond County.
I
I
B. Location: Site Parking Stalls
I
1. (1) Handicap van accessible space.
2. (I) Handicap car stall.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MOUNTING
I
A. Room identification signs shall be mounted to wall, latch side of door, with back surface fully
adhered with double stick foam tape. Room sign mounting height at 5'-0" A.F.F. to centerline and
2" to side of domjamb (from door handle side of jamb).
I
A. Material and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance of
complete signs.
I
3.2 GUARANTEE
3.3 EXTERIOR PANEL SIGNS
I
A. Install new signs with post set in I cu. ft. cement, each post. Provide 1 post/sign.
I
END OF SECTION 10440
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIAL TY SIGNS
10440-2
I
I
I
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK.
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work required for this Project.
1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
I
8. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
I
National Fire Protection Association (NFP A) Publication:
Volume 1, Section 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers
I
1.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The contract drawings indicate the locations.
I
1.4
SUB MITT ALS
I
A. Manufacturer's Data: Provide descriptive data on fire extinguisher cabinet; including thickness of
material, size and depth of cabinets, wall brackets, and replacement parts.
8. Manufacturer's Data on Fire Extinguishers.
I
C. Certificates: Certificates of Compliance shall be submitted showing the following:
D. Certification that fue extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations.
I
E. Certification that fire extinguishers comply with OSHA requirements.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (4 Required)
I
A. Provide metal semi-recessed mounted cabinets and wall brackets at locations shown on drawings
for each fire extinguisher. The fire extinguishers shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.
I
B. Materials: The cabinets shall be constructed of minimum 18 gage corrosion-resistant steel or
aluminum with 1-1/4 inch face trim on frame and all comers fully welded and ground smooth..
The doors shall be of heavy construction with inch face trim and full bubble type one piecej
molded clear plastic. Cabinet shall have a sign spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. I
Doors shall be fully hinged with Piano type hinge and furnished with handle and latch. The finishl
shall be electrostatic epoxy or backed on semigloss white enamel. Provide cabinets with 4" recessl
with trim return.
I
I
2.2
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (5 Required)
I
A. Fire extinguishers shall be multipurpose dry-chemical type, (Ammonium phosphate base), tested
I
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS
10522-1
I
I
to ANSIIUL 711 and ANSIIUL 299. Classification 4 A:60 B:C.
B. Material: The extinguisher shell shall be corrosion-resistant steel.
I
C. Size:Extinguishers shall be 10 pounds.
I
2.3 WALL BRACKETS. (Janitor's Closet)
A. Where fire extinguishers is indicated without cabinet provide a wall-hook bracket.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
A. Extinguishers shall be installed where indicated. The exact locations shall be verified prior to
installation. Install rue extinguisher cabinets in prepared openings and secure in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Install cabinet so that bottom is 40 inches above finish floor.
Extinguishers shall be fully charged and ready for operation upon installation.
I
3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
I
A. Repairing: Damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work shall be removed and replaced
with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.
I
8. Cleaning: Surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the work, shall be
cleaned in an approved manner. Equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish from the work shall be
removed from the site. Windows of extinguisher cabinet doors shall be cleaned on both exterior
and interior.
I
I
END OF SECTION 10522
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS
10522-2
I
I
I
SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1. 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK
I
A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and
Modifications are binding on all work for this project.
1.2 SUBMITI ALS
I
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
I
B. Manufacturer's catalogue data including installation instructions and dimensions.
C. Drawings and schedules for toilet accessories.
1.3
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. The following named manufacturers & products will be acceptable:
I
1. Bobrick
2. Bradley
3. American
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 GENERAL
A. All accessory items shall be by one manufacturer, unless noted otherwise. See Section 08800
Glass and Glazing for mirrors.
I
I
2.2 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
No. Item Description Manufacturer/Model #Mounting Height
A. TA-l. Clothes Hook Bobrick B-671 54" H/C
(mounted to wall) Bradley 9114 68" non-H/C
(one per toilet) American 7340S
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser- Bobrick B-686 19" to centerline
(Surface Mount Double Roll) Bradley 5234 33" from back wall
American 7305-2
TA-3. Handicap Grab Bars Bobrick B-6206 Series 36"
to centerline
1 _1/2" x length Bradley 800 Series 12" from wall
(42" at side of toilet) American 3200 Series
TA-4. Handicap Grab Bars Bobrick B-6206 Series 36"
to centerline
1-1/2" x length Bradley 800 Series 6" max. from
wall
(36" at back of toilet) American 3200 Series
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bobrick
Bradley
American
Bobrick
B-3904
234
0469
B223
5'-4" to top
T A-5 Towel Dispenser/Trash Receptacle
I
T A-6 Mop Holder
(Janitor Closet)
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
INST ALL A TION
I
All accessories to be mounted fIrmly into walls by using fasteners and blocking in the walls as
required to mount the accessories. All fasteners shall be concealed.
I
All items shall include accessories for installation in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions accompanying material.
I
Mounting heights shall be as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act or as shown on
plans. Bottom of mirror not to exceed 40" above finish floor.
I
All items installed shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act.
LOCATIONS.
I
Each handicap toilet shall have 2-grab bars, I-coat hook, and 1 -tissue dispenser, handicap sink, 1-
towel dispenser, and mirror.
I
END OF SECTION 10800
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10800-2
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORlES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Table of Contents Generated by MASTERWORKS: October 19,2000
Ioivision Section Title
Page~
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055 MOTORS
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15100 VALVES
15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15815 METAL DUCTS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15853 POWER VENTILATORS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15861 AIR FILTERS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
9
4
6
6
10
8
3
4
3
6
4
4
6
5
5
2
3
5
-
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3
1.4
A.
This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Divi-
sion 15 Sections. .
I. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Escutcheons.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
7. Field-fabricated metal equipment supports.
8. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Cutting and patching.
II. Touchup painting and fmishing.
B.
Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and
duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl
spaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces
and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
SUBMITTALS
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
.
1.7
A.
Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification ma-
terials and devices.
8.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal supports and anchorage for mechanical ma-
terials and equipment.
c.
Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ASME A 13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identifi-
cation devices.
8.
Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting me-
chanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are in-
creased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these
increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural ca-
pacity of floor, if stored inside.
C.
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Coordinate installation of identifYing devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are ap-
plied to surfaces. Install identifYing devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-2
I
I
d. Epco Sales Inc.
e. Hart Industries International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
I
2.
Dielectric Flanges:
I
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Epco Sales Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
I
3.
Dielectric Couplings:
I
a.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
Lochinvar Corp.
I
4.
Dielectric Nipples:
I
a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
b. Perfection Corp.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
I
5.
Metal, Flexible Connectors:
a. ANAMET Industrial, Inc.
b. Central Sprink, Inc.
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Flex- Weld, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Div.
h. Mercer Rubber Co.
I. Metraflex Co.
j. Proco Products, Inc.
k. Uniflex, Inc.
I
I
I
6.
Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
I
a.
b.
c.
Calpico, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Thunderl ine/Link -Seal.
I
2.2
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
I
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
I
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1 .20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
I
2.3
JOINING MA TERlALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
15050 - 3
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
2.6
A.
-
.
. 2.7
- A.
-
-
I
8.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
I. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
c.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with A WS D I O. 1 2 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness
and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
DIELECTRIC FITIINGS
General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent gal-
vanic action and stop corrosion.
Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types
and matching piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180
degF.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connec-
tions. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure. rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated,
and ends according to the following:
I. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded.
B.
Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered
with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space be-
tween pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
I. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 4
2.8
I
I
3.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
I
B.
Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal pro-
truding fittings and sleeves.
I
1.
2.
3.
ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
OD: Completely cover opening.
Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated fmish.
I
IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
I
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as refer-
enced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is In-
staller's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
I
B.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fas-
tened to equipment.
I
1.
Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels oftested compliances, and similar essential data.
Location: Accessible and visible location.
I
2.
C.
Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded,
pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A 13 .1.
I
D.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
1.
2.
Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment iden-
tification.
Punch for mechanical fastening.
Thickness: 1116 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
I
I
3.
4.
5.
E.
Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical
identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated
for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
I
1.
Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification
that indicates individual system number and service such as "Boiler No.3," "Air Supply No. IH,"
or "Standpipe FI2."
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Divi-
sion 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and cal-
culate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
c.
Install piping at indicated slope.
D.
Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E.
Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
G.
Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient
space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 -inch clearance around insulation.
J.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to pennit valve servicing.
K.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L.
Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M.
Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and
suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated finish.
Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-
plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
o.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Size sleeve for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials.
Q. Verify fmal equipment locations for roughing-in.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
15050 - 6
s.
Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual pip-
ing specification Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Solder-
ing of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full 10. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
4.
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal thread-
ing is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or dam-
aged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
5.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to A WS 010.12, "Recommended Practices and Proce-
dures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators ac-
cording to "Quality Assurance" Article.
T. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
3.2
1.
Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at fmal connection to
each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.
Install flanges, in piping 2-I/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at fmal connec-
tion to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
2.
3.
4.
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in dia-
grammatic form.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components
in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend
grease fittings to accessible locations.
Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment
shafts if possible.
BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
15050 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, unin-
sulated piping.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in fmished spaces, machine rooms, and acces-
sible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior nonconcealed locations:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
a.
b.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and tenninal units. Mark each pipe
at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible enclo-
sures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that pennit view of concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and tennination.
Spaced at maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
1.
Lettering Size: Minimum l/4-inch- high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2-inch- high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger letter-
ing for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of princi-
pal lettering.
Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
2.
c.
Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in fmished construction.
PAINTING AND FINISHING
A.
Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
I. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include fmish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fmish. Include two fmish coats
over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include fmish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fmish. Include two finish coats
over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
rust-inhibitive metal primer.
8.
Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
c.
I
I
I
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted fmishes with materials andproce-
dures to match original factory finish.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 8
I
I
3.5
CONCRETE BASES
I
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than4 inches larger in both directions than
supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie
locations. Use 3000-psig, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Divi-
sion 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I
3.6
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
I
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to sup-
port and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
I
B. Field Welding: Comply with A WS DI.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
3.7
CUTTING AND PATCHING
I
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechani-
cal installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
I
B.
Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
I
END OF SECTION 15050
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
15050 - 9
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
I
PART 1 . GENERAL
I
1.1
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
A.
This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting motors and
vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for
motor-driven equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of
equipment.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
MOTORS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
c.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINA TION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are:
1. Compatible with the following:
2.
a. Magnetic controllers.
Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throhghout
speed range without overheating.
Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
3.
4.
15055 - 1
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:
I
A.
1.
2.
Different ratings, perfonnance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section.
Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other
than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
I
MOTOR CHARACTERlSTICS
I
Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
I
Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
I
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is
connected.
I
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without
exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
I
POL YPHASE MOTORS
I
A.
Description: NEMA MG I, Design B, medium induction motor.
I
8. Efficiency: Standard efficiency according to NEMA MG 1, Para. 12.59 and Table 12-10.
c.
Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
I
I. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
I
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
I
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
I
H. Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.
Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I
I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
I
MOTORS 15055 - 2
I
I
I
I
1.
Finish: Gray enamel.
2.4 POL YPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
I
I
B.
I
I
I
2.5
A.
I
I
B.
c.
I
I
D.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG I requirements for thermally protected motors.
Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG I:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure winding resistance.
Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split-phase start, capacitor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-
protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft;
sealed, pre lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
I
I
-
B.
~
.
-
MOTORS
1.
Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at: motor
I
I
I
2.
3.
Run each motor with its controller.
design load.
Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
following:
I
I
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
15055 - 3
1.
Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections
for compliance with requirements.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Verify bearing lubrication.
Verify proper motor rotation.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 15055
MOTORS
15055 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2 SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
8. Related Sections include the following:
I
1.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration isola-
tion and seismic restraint devices.
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
I
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
1.4 SUBMITI ALS
I
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger
shield insert indicated.
B.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUF ACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I
1.
Pipe Hangers:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
Grinnell Corp.
GS Metals Corp.
.
.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 1
2.2
2.3
I
I
h.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
I
1.
j.
2.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
PHS Industries, Inc.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
I
I
3. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Gunnebo Fastening Corp.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
I
I
MANUFACTURED UNITS
I
A.
Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
I
1.
2.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied fmish.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
I
3.
Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
I
4.
I
5.
6.
7.
MISCELLANEOUS MA TERlALS
I
A.
Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
I
B.
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
I
C.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 361 A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, non shrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydrau-
lic-cement grout.
I
1.
Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exte-
rior applications.
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 2
I
I
I
I
2.
3.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLlCA nONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections.
I
I
c.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
I
I. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type I): For suspension of non insulated or insulated sta-
tionary pipes, NPS 112 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if lit-
tle or no insulation is required.
5. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non insulated stationary pipes,
NPS 112 to NPS 8.
7. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
8. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
9. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
10. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-
1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange.
1 I. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS I to NPS 30, from two rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
12. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from
single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specifica-
tion Sections, install the following types:
I. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specifica-
tion Sections, install the following types:
I
.
.
1.
2.
3.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type II, split pipe rings.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 3
3.2
I
I
4.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building at-
tachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I
5.
F.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification
Sections, install the following types:
I
I. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hang-
ers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction
to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, chan-
nels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are consid-
erable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange
edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for
heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for
heavy loads, with link extensions.
1 I. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams iftlexibility at beam is required.
14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal
movement where head room is limited.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing
insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density,
100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass
pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-
degree sheet metal shield.
I
2.
I
3.
I
HANGER AND SUPPORT INST ALLA TION
I
A.
Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, sup-
ports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
I
B.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated
loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of pip-
ing. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
c.
Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-
actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
D.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fas-
teners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other acces-
sories.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expan-
sion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
H.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflec-
tions allowed by ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
I.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with
clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME 831.9.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5.
6.
7.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment
above floor.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 5
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
3.5
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to fonn hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with A WS DI.l procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after fmishing and contours of welded
surfaces match adjacent contours.
2.
3.
4.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA I
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of2.0 mils.
8.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, and plenum insulation; insulating cements; field-
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: IdentifY thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Removable insulation sections at access panels.
Application of field-applied jackets.
Applications at linkages for control devices.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indi-
cating, interpreting, and certifYing test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this
Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50
or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of
150 or less. i
2.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
-
A.
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - I
1.6
1.7
I
I
COORDINA TION
I
A.
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
SCHEDULING
I
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments
of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
CertainTeed Manson.
Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp.
Schuller International, Inc.
I
INSULA TION MATERIALS
I
A.
Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with
ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, rein-
forcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
I
B.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with
ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, rein-
forcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
I
ACCESSORIES AND A IT ACHMENTS
I
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven
glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz.lsq. yd..
I
I. Tape Width: 4 inches.
I
B.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
I
I
C.
Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
I
DUCT INSULA nON
15081 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
D.
Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufac-
tured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness in-
dicated.
1.
Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures
of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of] 00 Ib for direct pull per-
pendicular to the adhered surface.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
3.2
I
I
3.3
A.
8.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMINA TION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions
affecting performance of insulation application.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and fmishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions;
with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each duct system.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.:
I
I
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. i
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhestve rec-
ommended by the insulation material manufacturer. I
H.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
DUCT INSULA nON
15081 - 3
I.
Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless
otherwise indicated.
J.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, sup-
ports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through
hangers and around anchor attachments.
K.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a
compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1.
2.
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints
and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
3.
M.
Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less
than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N.
Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
I. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mas-
tic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and
penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward
clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O.
Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.
1.
2.
3.
Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, ex-
cept rITe-rated walls and partitions.
Q.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at firelsmoke damper sleeves for fire-
rated wall and partition penetrations.
R.
Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of
floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with
vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins
and speed washers.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
DUCT INSULA TION
15081 -4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8.
2.
3.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical
ducts as follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3
inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation
tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation sur-
face. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing2 inches
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with
1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insula-
tion.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure
with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each
surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut
to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiff-
ener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to re-
ceive vapor retarder.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and
speed washers.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
Space anchor pins as follows:
2.
3.
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3
inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation
tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation sur-
face. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing2 inches
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with
1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing asipsula-
tion. I
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each
surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of el-
bows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to
fit the elbow.
5.
6.
DUCT INSULA nON
15081 - 5
3.5
A.
B.
I
I
7.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with6-
inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiff-
ener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to re-
ceive vapor retarder.
I
I
8.
DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
I
Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
I
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
D.
3.6
A.
8.
1.
2.
3.
Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
I
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, mate-
rials, and equipment:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
I
I
I
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
Service: Round, rectangular, supply-air, return-air, outside-air ducts, concealed.
I
I. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
2. Thickness: 1 -1/2 inches.
3. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
I
Service: Round, rectangular, supply-air, return-air, outside-air ducts, exposed.
I
I. Material: Mineral-fiber board.
2. Thickness: I inch.
3. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
I
END OF SECTION 15081
I
I
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 6
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
.
~
.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations
through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
SUBMITf ALS
A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
8.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insula-
tion.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
c.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indi-
cating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this
Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material container;s with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50
or less.
PIPE INSULATION
1 5083 - I
1.5
I
I
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of
150 or less.
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
I
1.6 COORDINATION
1.7
I
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section
"Hangers and Supports."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
I
SCHEDULING
I
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and test-
ing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test re-
sults.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
CertainTeed Manson.
Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp.
Schuller International, Inc.
I
2.
Cellular-Glass Insulation:
I
a. Pittsburgh-Coming Corp.
3.
Flexible Elastomeric Thennallnsulation:
I
a.
b.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Rubatex Corp.
I
4. Polyolefin Insulation:
a.
b.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
IMCOA.
I
INSULA nON MATERIALS
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thennosetting resin complying with the following:
1. Prefonned Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose,
vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:
a.
Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for
sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation.
Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
b.
4.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications.
Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type 11.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
5.
6.
B.
Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermeticalIy sealed
cells, incombllstible.
1.
2.
Prefonned Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class I.
Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
C.
Flexible Elastomeric Thennal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
D.
Polyolefm Insulation: UnicelIular polyethylene thermal plastic, prefonned pipe insulation. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density.
1.
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
E.
Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-
forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from20-mil- thick, high-
impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end
caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the
disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
C.
Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply withASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-
14 temper.
1.
Finish and Thickness: Corrugated fmish, 0.0 I 0 inch thick.
PIPE INSULATION
15083-3
2.4
I
I
2.
3.
Moisture Barrier: I-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material, finish, and
thickness as jacket.
I
ACCESSORIES AND A IT ACHMENTS
I
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MlL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven
glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
I
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
I
B.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
I
I
C.
Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
I
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
I
A.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
EXAMINA TION
I
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions
affecting performance of insulation application.
I
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect
insulation application.
I
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions;
with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
I
B.
Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each piping system.
I
PIPE INSULA nON
15083 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E.
Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
H.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive rec-
ommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integ-
rity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves,
and specialties.
L.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, sup-
ports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
I. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at
least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with
a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.
M.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to main-
tain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O.
Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1.
2.
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Se-
cure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced
4 inches o.c.
Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudi-
nal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
3.
a
Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints
and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
PIPE INSULA nON
15083 - 5
5.
At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-
retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.
Q.
R.
S.
1.
2.
3.
Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
4.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-
rated walls and partitions.
J. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping. II
Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
J.
For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports
penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULA nON APPLICA nON
A.
B.
c.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder
mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor re-
tarder between pipe insulation segments.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at6 inches
o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but
secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and
seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
2.
3.
4.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1.
2.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.
4.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
I. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PIPE INSULA nON
15083 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
I
I
I
3.5
2.
When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe
insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Se-
cure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
I. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve
body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without dis-
turbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without dis-
turbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
I
I
I
I
B.
I
I
I
C.
I
I
D.
PIPE INSULATION
1.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation ma-
terials.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder
mastic.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at6 inches
o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but
secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and
seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
2.
3.
4.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1.
2.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the same thickness as
pipe insulation.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at
least I inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.
4.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.
Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available. Secure according to manufacturers written instructions.
When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of cellular-glass
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
2.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve
body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without dis-
turbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without dis-
turbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
15083 - 7
3.6
3.7
I.
I
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
I
A.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1.
2.
Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
Seal longitudinal seams. and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to
avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
B.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
I
1.
2.
Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insula-
tion.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
I
3.
4.
I
C.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
J.
2.
Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
D.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
I
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached
according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permitac-
cess to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fab-
ricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended ad-
hesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
I
POL YOLEFIN INSULA nON APPLICA nON
I
A.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
I
I. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. For split tubes, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
3. For self-adhesive insulation, staple longitudinal seams after sealing. Cement to avoid openings in
insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
B.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
I
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of the same thickness as
pipe insulation.
I
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 8
I
I
I
I
4.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
I
I. Apply mitered sections ofpolyolefm pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
D.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
I
l.
Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached
according to the manufacturers written instructions.
Apply cut segments of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check
valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended ad-
hesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
2.
I
3.
4.
I
I
3.8
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICA nON
A.
Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with I-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with
manufacturers recommended adhesive.
I
B.
Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap
longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
I
3.9 FINISHES
I
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insula-
tion manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
I
3.10
PIPING SYSTEM APPLICA nONS
I
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, mate-
rials, and equipment:
I
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Below-grade piping.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
6. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
I
I
3.11 INSULATION APPLICA nON SCHEDULE, GENERAL
I
PIPE INSULA nON
15083 - 9
3.12
I
I
A.
Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-
applied jackets.
I
B.
Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and
jacket requirements.
I
INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
A.
Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
I
a.
b.
Copper Pipe, 'h to 1-1/4 NPS: 'h inch thick.
Copper Pipe, 1-1/2 to 4 NPS: 1 inch thick.
I
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
I
Service: Domestic cold water.
I
I. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
c.
D.
I
a. Copper Pipe, 'h to 4 NPS: 'h inch thick.
4.
5.
Field-Applied Jacket: None
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
I
Service: Rainwater conductors and roof drain bodies.
I
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F.
Insulation Material: Polyolefm.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
I
a. Cast Iron Pipe, 4 to 8 NPS: 'h inch thick.
I
4.
5.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
Service: Condensate drain piping.
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
Insulation Material: Polyolefin.
Insulation Thickness: 'h inch.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
I
I
END OF SECnON 15083
I
PIPE INSULA nON
15083 - 10
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15100 - VALVES
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
i
.
1.5
VALVES
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classifi-
cation, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and instaIlation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
C.
Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division I Section "Materials
and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.l for power
piping.
C.
MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
15 100 - I
I
I
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
I
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If out-
door storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
I
C.
Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels and
stems as lifting or rigging points.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
I
Gate Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
Hammond Valve Corporation.
Kitz Corp. of America.
Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
NIBCO Inc.
Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
Red-White Valve Corp.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
I
I
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
I.
2. Ball Valves:
3.
I
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
b. Hammond Valve Corporation.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
d. NIBCO Inc.
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe.
g. Victaulic Company of America.
I
I
Plug Valves:
a.
b.
Grinnell Corp.
Huber: lM. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Division (Resun Valves).
NIBCO Inc.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
Victaulic Company of America.
I
c.
d.
e.
I
4. Globe Valves:
V ALVES
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
Hammond Valve Corporation.
Kitz Corp. of America.
Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
I
15100 - 2
I
I
I
I e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NIBCO Inc.
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
I i. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
5. Butterfly Valves:
I a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
I d. Grinnell Corp.
e. Hammond Valve Corporation.
f. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
I g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NIBCO Inc.
J. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
I k. Tyler Pipe.
I. Ultraflo Corporation.
m. Victaulic Company of America.
I 6. Swing Check Valves:
a. Cia-Val Co.
I b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Kitz Corp. of America.
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
I f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
g. NIBCO Inc.
h. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
I I. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Victaulic Company of America.
I 7. Wafer Check Valves:
a. Cia-Val Co.
I b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
e. Kitz Corp. of America.
I f. Metraflex Company.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NIBCO Inc.
I J. Red-White Valve Corp.
J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Tyler Pipe.
I. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.
. m. Victaulic Company of America.
8. Lift Check Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Kitz Corp. of America.
VALVES 15 100 - 3
2.2
2.3
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
NIB CO Inc.
Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
Red-White Valve Corp.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A.
Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1.
Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section
and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
c.
Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator fea-
tures:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall
have square heads. Furnish Owner with I wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher above fm-
ished floor elevation.
E.
Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive
insulation.
F.
Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G.
Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
H.
Flanges: ASME B 16.1 for cast iron, ASME B 16.5 for steel, and ASME B 16.24 for bronze valves.
I.
Solder Joint: ASME B 16.18.
1.
Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840
deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
GATE VALVES
A.
Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure (CWP), or
Class ISO, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon
alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connec-
tions; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body
and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing
with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
VALVES 15100 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-llO, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and smaller
and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats
and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
I.
2.
3.
Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
A.
Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, l75-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug,
Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1.
Operator: Lever.
GLOBE VALVES
A.
Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi
CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-
alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B.
Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body
and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw
and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-
iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VALVES
A.
Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi CWP, ISO-psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and
stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:
I. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Lever handle with latch lock.
B.
Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150,
300-psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y -pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc
with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
C.
Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-7l, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze disclplates, ~tain-
less-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges. !
I
Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or! verti-
cal pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered
end connections. '
D.
E.
15100 - 5
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
F.
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
G.
I
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
I
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special
packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
I
C.
Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by
such operation.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
I
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,
length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and
freedom from defects and damage.
I
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
I
INSTALLATION
Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the gen-
eral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
I
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown.
.1
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
I
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
I
Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
I
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
I
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
I
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright
fmish. Clean valve socket.
I
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
VALVES 15100-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
D.
Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E.
Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F.
Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or
valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G.
Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it com-
pletely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling,
remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
THREADED CONNEcnONS
A.
Note the intemallength of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine
how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading
is specified.
D.
Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being
threaded.
FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A.
Align flange surfaces parallel.
B.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and
parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a
torque wrench.
e.
For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff
and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
I
I
I
Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
A.
1.
Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heat-
ing hot water and low-pressure steam service.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-112 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
2.
3.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
I
I
VAL YES
A.
General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for
throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and ar-
rangements.
151 00 - 7
I
I
3.8 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final ad-
justing and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15100
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VALVES
15100 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEcnON 15411 - WATER DlSTRIBUnON PIPING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
1.2
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Service Entrance Piping: 160 psig.
2. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Cleaning" articles.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B3l.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections I through 9 for
potable-water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
I
-
PIPES AND TUBES
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
B.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
e.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types Land M, water tube, drawn temper.
PIPE AND TUBE FIITINGS
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Ap-
plications" Article.
B.
Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B 16.22 wrought cop-
per.
C.
Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket joint,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Include
threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1 on threaded ends.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - I
2.3
D.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME BI6.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with baIl-and-socket joint,
metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends with threads according to
ASME B 1.20.1. Furnish Class 300 unions if required to match piping.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining ma-
terials.
B. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the foIlowing:
I. 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-lnch NPS: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
B.
Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:
1. 3-l/2-lnch NPS and SmaIler: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered
joints.
C.
Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the foIlowing:
] . 2-lnch NPS and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fit-
tings; and soldered joints.
VAL VE APPLICA nONS
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following re-
quirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, baIl, or butterfly valves.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.4
3.5
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping instaIlation.
A.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INST ALLA TlON
A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division ] 5 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construc-
tion.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
154] I - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-
tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, com-
plete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it has
been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been
tested and approved.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without ex-
ceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4
hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed, procedure described in either A WW A C651 or A WW A C652 or as described be-
low:
2.
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
I)
2)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least50 ppm of chlo-
rine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with waterlchlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure
if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
I
END OF SECnON 15411
I
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
154 II - 3
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
\.2
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: IO-foot head of water.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
A.
B.
Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping compo-
nents. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic
drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer pip-
ing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PIPES AND TUBES
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
B.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40.
PIPE AND TUBE FlITINGS
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Ap-
plications" Article.
B. Threaded-Fitting, End Connections: ASME B 1.20.1.
C.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.
D.
PVC Plastic, Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409 drainage pattern, with ends as required for application.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining ma-
terials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
3.2
I
PIPING APPLICA nONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground and Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1.
1-1/4- to 4 Inch NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
3.3 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLAnON
A.
Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direc-
tion of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y -branch and 1I8-bend fittings if 2 fix-
tures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and
crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use
proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
.
.
B.
Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and align-
ment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required
gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installa-
tion requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
C.
Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
I. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 3-inch NPS and
smaller; I percent downward in direction of flow for piping 4-inch NPS and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
D.
Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
E.
Install underground PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 2
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construc-
tion.
B. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
C.
Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe
handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
I.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction fmd that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
B.
Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of
published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-
tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, com-
plete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it
has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on
completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of over-
flow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspec-
tion starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on
roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pres-
sure of I-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pres-
sure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of
inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to pre-
vent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
I
D.
Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-based latex
paint.
I
END OF SECTION 15420
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 4
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALnES
PART I - GENERAL
l.l
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum work-
ing-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.2
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and
shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances,
and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing
specialty products:
I. Water hammer arresters.
2. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
3. Drain valves.
4. Hose bibbs.
5. Cleanouts.
6. Floor drains.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified stan-
dards.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
e.
Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following characteristics:
1.
2.
125-psig minimum working pressure.
Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
3.
4.
5.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: l/2-inch NPS threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: 1/2-inch NPS threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome fin-
ished.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-Il 0, 3/4-inch NPS ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. In-
clude 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats
and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B 1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIAL nES
A.
Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A 112.26.1 M, ASSE 1010, or POI- WH 20 I, bellows or piston type
with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units, ASME A 112.26.1 M
sizes A through F and POI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
B.
Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4-inch NPS threaded or solder-
joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and integral or field-installed, nonre-
movable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker.
I. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
2. Operation: Operating-key (handle) type. Include operating key.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTY INST ALLA nON
A.
General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturers
written instructions.
B.
Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of one
percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
C.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated,
according to the following:
I.
Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS. Use 4-inch NPS for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet for larger
piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleano,~ts for
piping below floors. I
E.
Install clean out wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for
clean outs located in concealed piping.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 2
I
I
F.
Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with wa-
terproof membrane.
I
G.
Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
I
I
H.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with fmished
floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
I.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates de-
pressed according to the following drainage area radii:
I
I.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depres-
sion.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to one percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than I-inch total de-
pression.
I
2.
3.
J.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.
I
K.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.
Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
I
L.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
M.
Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into waJls.
I
N.
Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
o.
Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use baJl, gate, or globe valve if
specific valve is not indicated.
I
P.
Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
I
Q.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
R.
Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.
I
S.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabi-
nets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons ifrequired to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
I
T.
Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.
END OF SECnON 15430
I
I
I
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 3
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
1.2
I
I
1
1.3
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
'I
I
1.5
I
I
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and other specialties not
specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible: Plumbing fIxture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and
used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Sec-
tion include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces,
traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I
SpecifIcation Sections.
B.
Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fit-
tings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and fmishes,
dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
e.
Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
D.
Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one
source and by a single manufacturer.
1.
Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufac-
turer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - I
1.6
1.7
I
I
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Architectural and Transportation Barriers Com-
pliance Board's (A TBCB) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UF AS), 1985-494-187" regarding
plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people.
I
c.
Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.
I
D.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
I
1.
2.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
I
E.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
I
F.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of
plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B.
Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
I
A.
Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and fmal fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures
can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS
I
A.
Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified.
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME AI12.19.1M.
National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2.
Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A 112.19.3M.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME AI12.19.2M.
I
I
2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS
A.
Comply with ASME AI12.18.lM and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar-type-
fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 2.5-gpm- maximum flow rate; and pol-
ished, chrome-plated fmish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
I
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 2
I
I
I
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FIITING STANDARDS
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Comply with ASME A 112.18.1 M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. In-
clude polished, chrome-plated fmish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other
components and connectors.
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028.
3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME AI12.l8.1M.
4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034.
5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
6. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing
fixtures, equipment, and appliances.
I
1. Floor Drains: ASME A 112.21.1 M.
2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME BI.20.7.
4. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI ZI24.5.
6. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1.
7. Supports: ASME A 112.6.1 M.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5 FIITINGS
A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for materi-
als for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.
B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:
I. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection.
2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; soldered, loose-key type; same size as sup-
ply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
3. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS flexible copper tube with knob end. Use chrome-plated tube for ex-
posed applications.
4. Traps: Tubular brass with 0.045-inch wall thickness, slip-joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, es-
cutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
5. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, with slip-joint inlet, and size to
match equipment.
6. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, and size to match equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINAnON
I
A.
Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping
systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 3
3.2
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I
I
match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data
when roughing-in data are not indicated. I
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
APPLICA nONS
I
A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following:
1.
2.
Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction.
Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water
coolers.
Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and other fixtures where indicated.
Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed,
box-mounted, electric water coolers.
I
3.
4.
I
B.
Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.
Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.
Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, offset drain, trap, and waste to
wall.
Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.
I
I
4.
PLUMBING FIXTURE INST ALLA nON
I
Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings,
and referenced standards.
I
Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
I
Install toilet seats on water closets.
Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals. I
Install flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. In-
stall other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach. I
Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compart-
ment.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports
are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
I
I.
Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall con-
struction, to reinforcement built into walls.
I
J.
Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
3.5
K.
Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
L.
Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
M.
Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
N.
Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop
valve is not specified.
1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when permitted by au-
thorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.
O.
Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
P.
Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
Q. Install supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.
R.
Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
S.
Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect
wastes, except where otherwise indicated.
T.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, fmished locations and within cabi-
nets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
CONN EcnONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment
specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B.
Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of
this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.
C.
Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with sup-
ply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to
match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.
D.
Ground equipment.
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 4868.
E.
Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is
specified in Division 16 Sections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 5
I
I
A.
Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
I
8.
Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
c.
Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
I
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
I
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.7
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and con-
trols.
I
B.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
I
c.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and mate-
rials. Include the following:
I
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
I
PROTECTION
I
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner.
I
END OF SECTION 15440
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 6
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
1.2
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including pipes, tubing,
fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
through basement walls and fIre/smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.
1.3 SUBMIIT ALS
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each refrigerant piping specialty specified.
C.
Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping and fittings, wall and floor penetrations. Show inter-
face and spatial relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and installation of the
piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper op-
eration and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
I.
2.
ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
PIPES AND TUBES
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530-1
I
I
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
I
2.2 PIPE AND ruBE FIITINGS
2.3
I
A.
Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
JOINING MATERIALS
I
A. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8, Classification BAg-l (Silver).
I
2.4 REFRIGERANT
A.
ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.
I
PART 3 - EXECUnON
I
3.1
3.2
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXAMINA nON
I
A.
Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory condi-
tions have been corrected.
I
APPLICA nONS
I
A.
Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
INST ALLA nON
I
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
I
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
I
Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with m inirnum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment
I
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for
insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-
thickness insulation.
I
F. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1.
Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been elimi-
nated.
I
G.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to me-
chanical injury.
I
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
3.5
H.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward away
from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I.
Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, un-
less expressly indicated.
K. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
L.
When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and packing
of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expan-
sion valve.
M.
Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 procedures.
N.
Charge system as follows:
I. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of35 deg F is indicated on vac-
uum dehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 2 psig.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-69.
B.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
C.
Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
D.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the folJowing maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Tube
sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88.
1. 1/2 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. 5/8 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. 1 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. 1-1/4 Inches: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
5. 1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. 2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
F.
Support vertical runs at each floor.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCnON
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530-3
3.6
3.7
I
I
A.
Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanicaf Materials
and Methods."
I
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent formation of
scale.
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B3l.5, Chapter VI.
1.
Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform fmal tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200 psig using
halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
I
B.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
I
c.
Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
COMMISSIONING
I
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:
I
I. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of35 deg F is indicated on vac-
uum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump
and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 15530
I
I
I
I
I
I
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530-4
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.l
I
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and com-
pressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be con-
nected to ducts.
I
I
1.3 DEFINlnONS
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
A.
Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for cooling
and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B.
Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a refrigerant
compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, out-
let velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteris-
tics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C.
Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division I.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units
and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." I
I
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70; Arti-
cle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 - 1
1.6
I
I
WARRANTY
I
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
I
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components
of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty pe-
riod.
I
C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of substantial completion.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
MANUF ACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
Lennox Industries Inc.
Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
York International Corp.
I
CONCEALED EV APORA TOR-FAN COMPONENTS
I
A.
Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of
panel.
I
I.
2.
Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
I
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with thermal-expansion valve.
I
C.
Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support
bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset thermal cutout; air-
flow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.
I
Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type.
I
Disposable Filters: I inch thick, in fiberboard frames.
I
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
I
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for
water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on ex-
terior of casing.
I
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-2
I
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.4
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor
motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
I. Compressor Type: Reciprocating.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with liquid subcooler.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
Mounting Base: Concrete.
ACCESSORIES
Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized,
and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to
building structure.
c.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
D.
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow ac-
cess to unit.
3.2 CONNECnONS
I
I
.
.
.
A.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be discon-
nected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty ar-
rangements.
C.
Ground equipment.
I. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDlnONING UNITS
15738-3
3.3
B.
e.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
I
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks ex-
ist.
I
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to conflITn proper motor rota-
tion and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
I
COMMISSIONING
I
Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
I
Perform startup checks according to manufacturers written instructions and do the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fill out manufacturer's checklists.
Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
VerifY that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
I
DEMONSTRA TION
I
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
I
I. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, trou-
bleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
I
END OF SECnON 15738
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 - 4
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating,
and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus lO-inch wg.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounted access
doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
3. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
4. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and fmal adjusting of
manual-volume dampers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In
this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or Wlm x K at the tem-
perature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1.
Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and-distribution equipment
and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifi-
cally approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations
showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pres-
sure.
1.5 SUBMIIT ALS
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and at-
tachments to other work.
2. Fittings.
3. Reinforcement and spacing.
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 1
\.6
I
I
4.
5.
6.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through frre-rated and other partitions.
Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic re-
straints, and duct attachment.
I
I
e.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
D.
Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and instalIed accesso-
ries and devices.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "lnstalIation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise
indicated.
I
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Deliver sealant and frrestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
I
B.
Store and handle sealant and frrestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommenda-
tions.
I
e.
Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with milI-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through
fabrication and instalIation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
APPLICA TION OF DUCT MATERIALS
I
A.
AII HV AC supply and return ductwork: Galvanized, sheet steel.
I
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
2.3
I
A.
Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-
phosphatized fmish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. Exposed ducts in Gymnasium and Cafeteria to
be paint grip finish.
I
B.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where instalIed on galvanized, sheet
metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
I
e.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
SEALANT MATERIALS
I
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic na-
ture but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, air-
tight seal.
Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant,
formulated with a minimum of75 percent solids.
Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
3.
4.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
A.
I
I
B.
I
I
C.
I
D.
I
I
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropri-
ate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more
than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
I. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized rods
with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct
materials.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are electrolytically
separated from ductwork.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
I
A.
I
I
I
B.
I
I
General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, ~ansitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with
galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexi-
ble." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications,
and joint types and intervals.
1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class re-
quired for pressure classification.
Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and
discolorations.
2.
Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
I. Supply Ducts: I-inch wg.
2. Return Ducts: I-inch wg, negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: I-inch wg, negative pressure.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 3
2.6
2.7
I
I
C.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359
inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of un braced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
I
ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
I
A.
Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Con-
struction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
I
B.
All exposed ducts in Gymnasium and Cafeteria shall be double-wall spiral duct, paint grip finish.
ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FIITING F ABRICA TION
I
A.
90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.
I
B.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material pro-
jecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
I
C.
Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction
type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
I
1.
Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
I
2.
I
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
I
3.
Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
I
4.
a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for ma-
terial-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend
radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows
and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle con-
figuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 de-
grees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle con-
figuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows, unless
space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
I
I
5.
I
6.
I
7.
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
8.
Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with two-
piece welded construction.
Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches and Pressures through 1O-lnch wg: 0.022 inch.
9.
10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DUCT INST ALLA nON, GENERAL
Duct instal1ation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general ar-
rangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
Construct and instal1 each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, paral1el and perpendicular to build-
ing lines; avoid diagonal runs.
Install ducts close to wal1s, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure
elements of building.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
Conceal ducts from view in fmished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless spe-
cifically indicated.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar
finished work.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment spaces and enclosures.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at leastI-l/2
inches.
N.
Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install
appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in
Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 5
A.
B.
e.
3.3
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
3.6
I
I
General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." I
Pressure Classification Less Than 2-lnch wg: Transverse joints.
Seal extemally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
I
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
I
Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
I
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
I
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-
test) load.
I
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
I
CONNECTIONS
I
Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Con-
struction Standards-- Metal and Flexible."
I
ADJUSTING
I
A.
Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
I
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
CLEANING
I
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum
ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
I
END OF SECnON 15815
I
I
I
MET AL DUCTS
15815-6
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
I
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Backdraft dampers.
Manual-volume dampers.
Fire and smoke dampers.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
Flexible ducts.
Flexible connectors.
Duct accessory hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
I. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
5. Flexible ducts.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clear-
ances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the fol-
lowing:
e.
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.
2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and pan-
els. I
I
Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels; and
airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights. I
I
I
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I,
NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
A.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - I
I
I
I. NFP A 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
I
A.
Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-
phosphatized fmish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
I
B.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed
matte fmish.
I
e.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet
metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
I
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, l/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
I
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
I
Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded comers and mounting flange.
I
Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
Blade Seals: Felt.
I
Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
I
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
'I
MANUAL- VOLUME DAMPERS
General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct
penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.
"I
I. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles
full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
'I
B.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated,
standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applica-
tions.
I
I
l.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with
mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flan-
geless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
"I
2.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-2
"I
I
I
I-
I
I.
2.4
I
I
I,
I
I
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
4.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made ofJ/32-inch- thick zinc-plated
steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include
elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B.
Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.
C.
Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch or 0.138 inch thick as indicated, and length to suit application.
Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with
sleeve requirements.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
Blades: RoB-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking
blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assem-
blies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
Frame: 0.040-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit ceiling construction.
Blades: 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel with non asbestos refractory insulation.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
TURNING VANES
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HY AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1 /2-inch- wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
e.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fi-
brous-glass fill.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-3
2.7
2.8
I
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
I
.1
A.
General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B.
Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
.1
C.
Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and number
of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-
by-I-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
.1
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E.
Insulation: l-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
II
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
'I
A.
General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181,
Class I.
,I
B.
Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum sheets.
Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
I
c.
Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached
to two strips of 4-3/8-inch- wide, O.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
I
D.
Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloro-
prene.
I
1.
2.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz.lsq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp, and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling.
I
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
2.10
I
A.
General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B.
Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-
inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
I
I.
2.
3.
Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film.
Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
I
C.
Pressure Rating: 2-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.
I
ACCESSORY HARDWARE
I
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket.
Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thick-
ness.
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-4
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-
gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
C.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLAnON
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
3.2
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Stan-
dards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C.
Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install fIre dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
1.
Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E.
Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream
from volume dampers, fIre dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting,
and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B.
Adjust rITe dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing. "
I
END OF SECTION 15820
I
I
I
-
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 5
SECTION 15853 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
1.3
1.4
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Ceiling mounted ventilators
8.
Related Sections: The fo\1owing Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches.
c.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the Drawings.
1.
Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power charac-
teristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations, and required
accessories.
2.
SUBMlIT ALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), fur-
nished specialties, accessories, and the following:
I. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
2. Material gages and fmishes, including color charts.
3. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
e.
Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
POWER VENTILATORS
15853 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;1
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
I
D.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E.
Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and
labeled by UL where available.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
I. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defmed in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
c.
AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use the
AMCA Seal.
D.
NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable NEMA
standards.
E.
UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans have
been commissioned.
1.7 COORDINAnON AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
2.1
I
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators:
a. Ammerman Company, Inc.
b. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
c. Carnes Co.
d. Chelsea Fans & Blowers, Inc.
e. Cook (Loren) Co.
POWER VENTILATORS
15853-2
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
2.5
I
I
f.
g.
h.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
Essick Air Products, Breidert.
FloAire, Inc.
ILG Industries, Inc.
Jenn Industries Inc.
I
I
I.
J.
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
I
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall, or for concealed in-line applica-
tions.
Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
I
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel
shall be removable for service.
I
Grille: Stainless-steel, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor I
plug-in.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50 percent. I
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
I
MOTORS
Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
I
I
Motor Construction: NEMA MG I, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
I
I
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before fmal assembly.
B.
Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
I
,
I
c.
Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing
Fans for Rating."
I
POWER VENTI LA TORS
15853-3
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
A.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and other con-
ditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfac-
tory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
A.
Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8.
Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."
I. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation
springs.
2. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
c.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
I
3.4
:;
-
.....
-
.
3.5
-
-
_.
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings in-
dicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make fmal duct connections with flexible
connectors.
8.
Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C.
Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding con-
nections, according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque
values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C.
Lubricate bearings.
CLEANING
A.
After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and
repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel and
cabinet.
POWER VENTILATORS
15853 - 4
I
I
3.6 COMMISSIONING
C.
D.
E.
3.7
A.
B.
e.
I
A.
Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup:
1.
2.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping,
ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is
installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free
rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and in-
stall belt guards.
Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct-
work systems are in the fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
I
I
3.
4.
I
5.
6.
I
7.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
I. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to in-
dicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
I
I
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
I
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
I
I
DEMONSTRA nON
Train Owners maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, trou-
bleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
,I
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECnON 15853
I
I
I
I
I
POWER VENTILATORS
15853 - 5
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
1.2
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
-
I
I
1.5
-
I
I
-
.
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and
grilles.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and com-
prised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to
promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B.
Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a
sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
e.
Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction,
fmish, and mounting details.
Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of
air outlet and inlet.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and
grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' prod-
ucts with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the In-
stallation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15855-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of
Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3
3.4
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and acces-
sories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume,
noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much
as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where
architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final
location.
c.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and mainte-
nance of dampers, air extractors, and fife dampers.
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
CLEANING
A.
After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to
remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged fmishes.
END OF SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15855-2
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
] .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
-
I
-
I
I
1.4
.
-
-
-
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter
from air for HV AC applications.
SUBMIIT ALS
A.
Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required clearances and
access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test
method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assemblies and at-
tachments.
1.
2.
Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages.
c.
Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are
based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteris-
tics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
c.
ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing and ratin~ air-
filter units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Filters and Filter-Holding Systems:
AIR FILTERS 15861 - I
2.2
a. AAF International.
b. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp.
c. Farr Co.
d. Flanders Filters, Inc.
e. International Air Filter, Inc.
2.
Filter Gages:
a.
b.
Airguard Industries, Inc.
Dwyer Instruments Inc.
EXTENDED-SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS
A.
Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters with holding frames.
B.
Media: Fibrous material formed into deep- V -shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.
c.
Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.
D.
Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting to-
gether into built-up filter banks.
. 2.3 FILTER GAGES
A.
Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white
background, and front recalibration adjustment.
I.
2.
Diameter: 4-1/2 inches.
Range: 0- to O.5-inch wg.
B.
Manometer- Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale, logarithmic-curve tube
gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from 0- to 3.0-inch wg, and accurate within 3 percent
of full scale range.
c.
Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames
to substrate.
c.
Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D.
Install filter gage for each filter bank.
AIR FILTERS
15861 - 2
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
E.
Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure pressure drop
through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position.
Adjust and level inclined gages.
I
I
F.
Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
3.2 CLEANING
I
A.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
I.
END OF SECTION 15861
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
.
I
I
I
.
AIR FILTERS
15861 - 3
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
1.3
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HV AC systems to produce design objectives, in-
cluding the following:
1.
Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to in-
dicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
Adjusting total HV AC systems to provide indicated quantities.
Measuring electrical performance of HV AC equipment.
Setting quantitative performance of HV AC equipment.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed
or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and termi-
nals, according to design quantities.
C.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air veloc-
ity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's
skin than is normally dissipated.
D.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.
E.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced ca-
pacities in all or part of a system.
G.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan
when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.
H.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution
system.
I. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.4
A.
I
I
.1
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
SUBMIIT ALS
Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in
this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or
NEBB.
B.
Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing
field data reports. This certification includes the following:
I.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting,
and balancing reports.
Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjust-
ing, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
2.
C.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.
E.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required
by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDInONS
i
I
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing,
adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing op-
erations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HV AC
controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systems and equipment to support and lassist
testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 2
I
I
PART 3 - EXEcunON
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
A.
Examine system and equipment installations to verifY that they are complete.
I
B.
Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I
GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
I
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC national standards and this Section.
I
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes
and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and fmish ac-
cording to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
I
c.
Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to
show fmal settings.
I
FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
I
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
I
Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I
Check for airflow blockages.
I
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
I
CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
I
Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufac-
turer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
I
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,
upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
I
b.
c.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
i
I
I
I
I
2.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect
factors to identifY where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and ac-
tual conditions.
Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer. Make required
adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed
changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufactur-
ers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure
no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling and full heating to determine the maxi-
mum required brake horsepower.
3.
4.
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.
1.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a.
Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow
for that zone.
2.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust sub-
mains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
I. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturers written instruc-
tions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air termi-
nals.
1.
Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2.
TEMPERA TURE-CONTROL VERIFICA nON
VerifY that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control func-
tions.
Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
I
I
,
I
I
VerifY sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate
with airflow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. ;
VerifY operation of limiting controllers (Le., high- and low-temperature controllers).
F.
ConfIrm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 4
3.6
3.7
3.8
I
I
TOLERANCES
I
A.
Set HV AC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
\.
2.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
I
FINAL REPORT
I
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
I
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing en-
gineer.
I
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
I
A.
Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing
to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
I
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-
peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-
peak summer and winter conditions.
I
END OF SECnON 15990
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSnNG, AND BALANCING
15990 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Eastview Park
JLA No. 42.0002
Table of Contents Generated by MASTERWORKS: October 18,2000
/Division ...... Section Title ............................................................................................. .................................. Page~
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050.......... BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ....................... .................................. 6
16060.......... GROUNDING AND BONDING ............................................................. .................................. 3
16140.......... WIRING DEVICES ................................................................................. .................................. 2
16410.......... ENCLOSED SWITCHES ........................................................................ .................................. 2
16442 .......... PANELBOARDS..................................................................................... .................................. 3
16491 .......... FUSES ...................................................................................................... .................................. 2
16511 .......... INTERIOR LIGHTING ........................................................................... .................................. 3
I
I
-
I
-
I
-
.
SEcnON 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Electricity-metering components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70, Article 100
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINA nON
A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in
building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. Set
inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the
Work.
c.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. Coordinate
installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including
provision for electricity-metering components. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.
D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of
identification devices with completion of finished surface.
E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar
finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
;'
j
2.1 RACEWAYS
A.
EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with compression fittings.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
-
.
I
2.4
.
I
.
-
.
RMC: ANSI C80. I.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings.
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
CONDUCTORS
Conductors, No. 10 A WG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 A WG: Stranded copper.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum.
Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service
indicated.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
c.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/l6-inch- diameter slotted holes
at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with
retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps.
E. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
F.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less
than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
B.
Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the
following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-2
2.5
C.
Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers
and letters.
D.
Engraved-Plastic Labels: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate 1/I6-inch minimum thickness.
Engraved legend in white letters on black background.
EQUIPMENT FOR UnLITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING
A.
Current- Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
B.
Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLAnON
3.2
3.3
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and
install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:
1. Exposed: RMe.
2. Underground: RNC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B.
Use the following raceways for indoor installations:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMe.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.
RACEWAY INST ALLA nON
A.
Conceal raceways, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
B.
Install raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Locate
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
-
I
I
I
C.
Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
D.
Make conduit bends and offsets so 10 is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight
legs of offsets parallel.
E.
Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location.
F.
Transition from RNC to RMC or EMT before rising above floor.
G.
Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory
elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for exposed parallel
raceways.
H.
Instal1 pul1 wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 A WG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire.
1.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of
72-inch flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations.
WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
Service: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
WIRING INSTALLATION
Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
c.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
D.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four;
minimum of200-lb design load.
3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
I
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-4
3.8
I
I
B.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,
clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods
and conduits.
I
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
I
D.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in
the future.
I
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F.
Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods.
I
G.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead
of malleable-iron hangers for 1-l/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch
circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
I
H.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-
metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to
raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than
24 inches from the box.
I
I.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to
structural elements of adequate strength.
I
J.
Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated.
Perform fastening according to the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.
Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test
load.
I
I
IDENTIFICA nON MATERIALS AND DEVICES
I
A.
Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment.
I
B.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with
corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
I
e.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
I
D.
Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power,
control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate
6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker.
I
E.
Color-code 240/120- V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the
secondary electrical system as follows:
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Phase A: Black.
2. Phase B: Red.
3.9 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty
conduits as required by utility company.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed fmish. Remove
burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 16050
I
I
I
-
.
-
-
-
-
I
.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 6
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.2 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70, Article 100
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Material: Copper.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
2.2
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, SIzeS, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
2.3
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1.
Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPLICA TlON
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors,
unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFP A 70 are indicated.
Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
INSTALLATION
Ground Rods: Install at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from
other grounding electrodes. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Make connections without exposing steel
or damaging copper coating.
B.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible. A void obstructing access or
placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
C.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductor, in conduit, from building's
main service equipment to main metal water service entrance to building. Connect grounding conductors
to main metal water service pipe by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is
installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit
or sleeve to conductor at each end.
.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8A WG and larger, use pressure-type grounding
lugs. No. 10 A WG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type
connectors.
C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without
mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing.
Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing.
Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare
grounding conductors.
D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - 2
I
I
E.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential
pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer.
Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
I
F.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses,
insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
I
END OF SECTION 16060
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEcnON 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and rmish plates.
1.2 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as dermed in NFPA 70, Article
100.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 COORDINA nON
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
-
.
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bryant Electric, Inc.
Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.
Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
.
-
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
B.
GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex
receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for
installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.
-
-
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - I
2.3
2.4
2.5
I
I
SWITCHES
I
A.
Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type, 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
WALL PLATES
I
A.
Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
I
I. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth plastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth plastic.
I
FINISHES
I
A.
Color: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
PART 3 - EXEcunON
I
3.1
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
lNST ALLA nON
I
Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
I
Install wall plates when painting is complete.
Arrangement of Devices: Mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of
receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I
Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
I
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening
values.
I
G.
Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Replace damaged or defective
components.
I
H.
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall
plates or devices.
I
END OF SECTION 16140
I
I
I
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches.
1.2 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data
on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70, Article 100
and marked for intended use.
-
.
B.
Comply with NEMA KS 1.
-
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches with other construction, including conduit, piping,
equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for
equipment access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:
I. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS I, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch: NEMA KS I, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable
handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16410 - 1
I
I
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
I
PART 3 - EXEcunON
I
3.1
EXAMINA TlON
I
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with instal1ation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
I
3.2
INST ALLA TION
I
A.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary
blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
I
B.
Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with laminated-plastic nameplate.
c.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
I
D.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and
other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed
surfaces to match original finish.
I
END OF SECTION 16410
I
I
I
i
i
I
-
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16410-2
I
I
I
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment
rated 600 V and less.
I
1.2
SUBMIIT ALS
I
A.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
I
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices and auxiliary components.
I
I
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100
and marked for intended use.
-
!!!!
B.
Comply with NEMA PB I.
.
c.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates
walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and
encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - I
2.2 F ABRICA nON AND FEATURES
2.3
2.4
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB I, Type I, to meet environmental conditions at
installed location.
B.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions.
C.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door.
D.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded
to box.
E.
Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service
disconnect switches.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future
installation of devices.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent
units.
8. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number
of poles.
I. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting
loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUnON
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor.
e.
Mounting: . Plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
D.
Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Use a computer or typewriter to
create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
PANELBOARDS
16442 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
E.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
I
F.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with laminated-plastic nameplate.
I
G.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
H.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and
other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed
surfaces to match original finish.
I
I
END OF SECTION 16442
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
-
=
PANELBOARDS
16442 - 3
I
I
SEcnON 16491 - FUSES
I
PART I - GENERAL
I
1.1
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
c.
D.
1.4
A.
SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less.
SUBMIIT ALS
I
A.
Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE I
Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 I
and marked for intended use.
Comply with NEMA FU 1. I
Comply with NFPA 70.
I
COORDINA nON
Coordinate fuse ratings with HV AC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse
size.
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUF ACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
Ferraz Corp.
Gould Shawmut.
Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
I
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
I
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU I, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage
rating consistent with circuit voltage.
I
FUSES 16491-1
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with
characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.2 FUSE APPLlCAnONS
I
A.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
I
B.
Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
3.3 INSTALLATION
I
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.
I
B.
Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.
END OF SECTION 16491
I
I
-
FUSES
16491-2
I
I
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes interior lighting fIxtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces,
lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.
I
1.2 SUBMIIT ALS
1.3
1.4
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, and the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dimensions of fixtures.
Electrical ratings and photometric data.
Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
Types of lamps.
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
I
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
I
NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.
COORDINA nON
I
A.
Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with
ceiling system and other construction.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A.
A vailable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the lighting fixture schedule on the plans.
I
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
I
A.
General Requirements: Features include the following:
I
I. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - I
I
-
I
I
I
B.
I
I
I
2.3
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
3. Sound Rating: A.
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Features include the following, besides those In "General
Requirements" Paragraph above:
I.
2.
3.
Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Features include the following:
I
I
I
2.4
A.
I
I
I
2.5
I
A.
I
I
I
I.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Constant wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single lamp ballasts.
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
EXIT SIGNS
General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent
of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored. relay disconnects lamps, and battery is
automatically recharged and floated on charger.
EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body.
Comply with UL 924.
I.
Test Switch and Light-Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening
fixture or entering ceiling space.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamp, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
2.
3.
4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I.
3.1
A.
1
I
INST ALLA TlON
Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturers
written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 2
I
I
B.
Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings:
1.
Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more
than 6 inches from fixture comers.
Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center
in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least tw03/4-inch metal channels
spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
I
2.
3.
I
3.2
CONNECTIONS
I
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
I
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
I
I
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
I
END OF SECTION 16511
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 3
-I